WO2024032156A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024032156A1
WO2024032156A1 PCT/CN2023/101263 CN2023101263W WO2024032156A1 WO 2024032156 A1 WO2024032156 A1 WO 2024032156A1 CN 2023101263 W CN2023101263 W CN 2023101263W WO 2024032156 A1 WO2024032156 A1 WO 2024032156A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network element
management network
access
message
location management
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/101263
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
贾建鑫
吴问付
宗在峰
李光磊
胡晓东
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024032156A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024032156A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/16Performing reselection for specific purposes
    • H04W36/18Performing reselection for specific purposes for allowing seamless reselection, e.g. soft reselection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/02Services making use of location information

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of mobile communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • the UE Based on the current terminal equipment (such as user equipment (UE)) positioning technology, the UE is in the connection management-connected (CM-connected) state and the radio resource control (RRC) inactive (RRC) state. -inactive) state, the base station will be replaced due to the movement of the UE. Therefore, in order to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and reduce the positioning delay, the source base station needs to send the UE positioning information (positioning information) through UE-related signaling. to the target base station to ensure the continuity of the UE's positioning service.
  • CM-connected connection management-connected
  • RRC radio resource control
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the AMF or LMF serving the UE may expire, causing the positioning service to fail and the positioning service to continue. Sex is not guaranteed.
  • This application provides a communication method and device to avoid positioning service failure due to LMF changes and improve positioning service continuity.
  • this application provides a communication method.
  • the communication method may be implemented by an access management network element or a component in the access management network element, such as at least one of a processor, a transceiver, a processing module or a transceiver module.
  • Access management network elements may include 5G core network elements, such as access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • the method includes: the first access management network element receives a first message sent by the second access network device, where the first message includes the first location management network element The identification and the first positioning information, the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, wherein the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the 2.
  • the first access management network element may also determine a second location management network element, and the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the first access management network element may also send a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the first access network device.
  • the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device, and a first indication, and the cell belongs to the second access network device.
  • the first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed.
  • the third message is used to notify that the location management network element has changed.
  • the third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information.
  • first access management network element receives the first message sent by the second access network device, the first message includes the identity of the first location management network element and the first positioning information, and the first The location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, where the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device
  • first message includes the identity of the first location management network element and the first positioning information
  • first The location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, where the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device
  • the first access management network element receives the first message sent by the second access network device, where the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and the first positioning information.”
  • first access management network element may also determine a second location management network element, and the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the above “the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device” can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
  • the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device and/or the first access network device to the first access network device.
  • the location management network element is used to receive the positioning information of the terminal device sent from the first access network device.
  • the first location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the first location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the first access network device.
  • the first location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the first access network equipment.
  • the first location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device.
  • the first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the first access network device.
  • the first location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the first access network equipment.
  • the first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the first access network device and/or the first location management network element is used to receive information from the first access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
  • the first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device.
  • the first location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the above "the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device” can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
  • the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive the positioning information sent from the second access network device.
  • the positioning information of the terminal device is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive the positioning information sent from the second access network device. The positioning information of the terminal device”.
  • the second location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the second access network equipment.
  • the second location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the second access network equipment.
  • the second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive information from the second access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
  • the second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element can receive the identifier and the first positioning carrying the first location management network element.
  • the first message of the information and determines the second location management network element, wherein the second location management network element can be used to provide positioning services for the terminal device located in the second access network device.
  • the second access network device may send at least one of the first positioning information, the identification of the second access network device, the first indication, or the cell identification to the second location management network element, and the second location management
  • the network element handles the positioning service of the UE and avoids positioning continuity interruption caused by changes in the location management network element after movement, thereby causing positioning failure. Therefore, positioning service continuity can be improved.
  • the first access management network element may send the third message to the second access network device, so that the second access network device learns that the location management network element has changed, so that the second access network device updates the location serving the UE.
  • the identity of the location management network element For example, the second access network device can update the identity of the first location management network element to the identity of the second location management network element to avoid the positioning service of the terminal device due to the location management network element after the move. Changes lead to positioning continuity terminals, which in turn cause positioning failures, in order to improve the continuity of positioning services.
  • the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device or “after the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device” can be understood as:
  • the terminal device may send data/signal/signaling to the second access network device and/or receive data/signal/signaling sent from the second access network device.
  • the first indication is used to indicate that the access network device has changed can be understood as: the terminal device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood as that the terminal device completes the transition from the first access network device to the second access network device.
  • the network access device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches to the second access network device.
  • the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  • the second message may further include a second indication for indicating that the location management network element has changed.
  • the first access management network element may also receive a fourth message, where the fourth message includes the terminal Device location information.
  • the first access management network element may also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element can determine the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device included in the fourth message.
  • the first access management network element can also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element can also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element can also determine and select the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device";
  • the first access management network element may also select the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element can also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element may determine the second location management network element based on the service area of the second location management network element and the location information of the terminal device. For example, when the information of the second location management network element is locally configured ( locally configured) in the first access management network element or the first access management network element obtains the service area information of the second location management network element from the NRF.
  • the first access management network element may also determine the second location management network element based on policy information (policy) and the location information of the terminal device. For example, when the location information of the terminal device includes the second When the access network equipment identification and/or the cell identification included in the second access network equipment are determined, the first access management network element determines the second location management network element according to the policy.
  • policy policy
  • the fourth message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting creation of a context of the terminal device.
  • the first message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting to create a context of a terminal device, and the first message also includes the terminal device. location information.
  • the first access management network element may also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device;
  • the first access management network element can determine the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device included in the first message.
  • the first access management network element may further determine based on the location information of the terminal device that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element can determine based on the location information of the terminal device that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device, that is, the location management network element that provides services for the terminal device needs to be changed.
  • the "the first access management network element can also determine that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device based on the location information of the terminal device” can be understood as:
  • the service area of the first location management network element cannot cover the current location of the terminal device represented by the location information of the terminal device. Therefore, the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element sends the third message to the first access network device, and the first access management network element can also receive a fifth message,
  • the fifth message includes at least one of the following information: the identity of the second location management network element, the positioning service identity, a third indication, the identity of the terminal device, and the terminal context identity.
  • the third indication is used to indicate the location.
  • the management network element has changed.
  • the identity of the second location management network element and/or the third indication may be used to determine that the location management network element that provides services for the terminal device has changed.
  • At least one of the positioning service identifier, the terminal device identifier, and the terminal context identifier may be used to indicate the terminal device, that is, the positioning service of the terminal device, wherein the third message may be determined based on the fifth message.
  • the access network device can learn the change of the location management network element according to the third message from the first location management network element, and/or, or the terminal equipment and/or positioning service corresponding to the changed location management network element, and There is no need to learn the above changed information from the location management network element, which improves the efficiency of the terminal equipment and/or positioning services corresponding to the location management network element that is informed of the change.
  • the first access management network element may also receive a sixth message from the second access management network element, where the sixth message is used to extract the UE context.
  • the first access management network element may also determine that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context.
  • the first access management network element can obtain the sixth message from the second access management network element to obtain the UE context, and determine that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context, wherein the second access management network element
  • the element may be an access management network element accessed when the terminal device is in the first access network device.
  • the first access management network element may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element; or , the first access management network element may also provide the first location management network element or the third
  • the second location management network element sends the identifier of the first access management network element, the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier.
  • the first access management network element may also send a seventh message to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, where the seventh message is used to Indicates that the access management network element has changed.
  • the first location management network element or the second location management network element can learn that the access management network element has changed.
  • this application provides a communication method.
  • the communication method may be implemented by a location management network element or a component in the location management network element, such as at least one of a processor, a transceiver, a processing module or a transceiver module.
  • Access management network elements may include 5G core network elements, such as LMF.
  • the method includes: the second location management network element receives a second message from the first access management network element, where the second message includes the first positioning information. , at least one of a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device and a first indication, the cell belongs to the second access network device; the second location management network element may also be used to provide information to the second access network device.
  • the second access network device sends positioning information of the terminal device, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device.
  • the first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed.
  • the above "the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device” can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
  • the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive the positioning information sent from the second access network device.
  • the positioning information of the terminal device is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive the positioning information sent from the second access network device. The positioning information of the terminal device”.
  • the second location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the second access network equipment.
  • the second location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the second access network equipment.
  • the second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive information from the second access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
  • the second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device or “after the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device” can be understood as:
  • the terminal device may send data/signal/signaling to the second access network device and/or receive data/signal/signaling sent from the second access network device.
  • the first indication is used to indicate that the access network device has changed can be understood as: the terminal device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood as that the terminal device completes the transition from the first access network device to the second access network device.
  • the network access device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches to the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element may also send a fifth message to the first access management network element, where the fifth message includes the identification of the second location management network element and/or a third indication, and the third The indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  • the fifth message further includes at least one of the following information: an identification of the terminal device, a terminal context identification, and a positioning service identification.
  • the second location management network element may also send the first positioning information to a third access network device, and the third access network device is the second location management network element. Access network equipment selected by the user.
  • the third access network device is an access network device selected by the second location management network element according to the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device, so The cell belongs to the second access network device.
  • the third access network device includes an access network device adjacent to the second access network device.
  • the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  • the second location management network element may also receive an identification of the first access management network element; or, the second location management network element may receive the first access management network element.
  • the second location management network element may also update the terminal according to the identity of the first access management network element.
  • the positioning context of the device; or, the second location management network element may also update the terminal according to the identity of the first access management network element, the identity of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identity. The device's positioning context.
  • this application provides a communication method.
  • the communication method may be implemented by an access network device or a component in the access network device, such as at least one of a processor, a transceiver, a processing module or a transceiver module.
  • Access network equipment may include wireless access network equipment, such as base stations.
  • the method includes: the second access network device determines a first configuration, the first configuration includes a channel sounding reference signal configuration and/or a positioning reference signal configuration, and the terminal device determines from The first access network device moves to the second access network device.
  • the second access network device may also send a first message to the first access management network element, where the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and first positioning information, where the first positioning information includes In the first configuration, the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device.
  • the above “the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device” can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
  • the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device and/or the first location management network element is used to receive the location information sent from the first access network device.
  • the positioning information of the terminal device is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device and/or the first location management network element is used to receive the location information sent from the first access network device. The positioning information of the terminal device”.
  • the first location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the first location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the first access network device.
  • the first location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the first access network equipment.
  • the first location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device.
  • the first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the first access network device.
  • the first location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the first access network equipment.
  • the first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the first access network device.
  • the first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the first access network device and/or the first location management network element is used to receive information from the first access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
  • the first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device.
  • the first location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device or “after the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device” can be understood as:
  • the terminal device may send data/signal/signaling to the second access network device and/or receive data/signal/signaling sent from the second access network device.
  • the second access network device may also receive a third message from the first access management network element, where the third message is used to notify the location management network element that the location management network element has changed.
  • the third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: the identifier of the first location management network element and the third Two indications, the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  • the second access network device receives a first parameter from the first access network device, where the first parameter includes requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or Requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information.
  • the second access network device may also determine the first configuration according to the first parameter.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, which may be a first access network device or a module in the first access network device.
  • the device has the function of implementing any implementation method of the above-mentioned first aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware, or it can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, which may be a second location management network element or a module in the second location management network element.
  • the device has the function of implementing any implementation method of the above second aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware, or it can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, which may be a module in the second access network device or a module in the second access network device.
  • the device has the function of implementing any implementation method of the above third aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware, or it can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the device is running, the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory to cause the device to execute Any implementation method in the above first to third aspects.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including units or means (means) for executing each step of any implementation method in the above-mentioned first to third aspects.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including a processor coupled to a memory.
  • the processor is configured to call a program stored in the memory to execute any implementation method in the above first to third aspects.
  • the memory may be located within the device or external to the device.
  • the processor can be one or more.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit and execute any implementation method in the above-mentioned first to third aspects.
  • the processor includes one or more.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes a computer program or instructions.
  • the computer program or instructions are run by a communication device, any one of the above-mentioned first to third aspects is enabled.
  • the implementation method is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, in which instructions are stored, and when run on a communication device, the instructions in the first to third aspects are implemented. Any implementation method of is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a chip system, including: a processor configured to execute any implementation method in the above first to third aspects.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a communication system, including a first access management network element for performing any of the methods of the first aspect, and a second location for performing any of the methods of the second aspect.
  • the management network element may include a second access network device for performing any of the methods of the third aspect above.
  • Figure 1A is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 1B is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by this application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by this application.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a data transmission method and device.
  • the method and the device are based on the same inventive concept. Since the principles of the method and the device to solve the problem are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and the repeated parts will not be repeated.
  • "and/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, alone There are three situations B.
  • the character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship. At least one mentioned in this application refers to one or more; multiple refers to two or more.
  • User equipment also called terminal equipment
  • terminal equipment is a device with wireless transceiver functions that can be accessed through the (wireless) access network equipment (radio access network, (R)AN) (or it can also be called An access device) communicates with one or more core network (CN) devices (or can also be called core devices).
  • R radio access network
  • CN core network
  • user equipment and terminal equipment can be replaced with each other.
  • User equipment may also be called an access terminal, terminal, subscriber unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile station.
  • User equipment can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons, satellites, etc.).
  • the user equipment may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a smart phone, a mobile phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) website, personal digital assistant (PDA), etc.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the user equipment may also be a handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, a computing device or other device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a drone device or a terminal in the Internet of Things, the Internet of Vehicles, the fifth generation Mobile communication (5th-generation, 5G) networks and any form of terminals in future networks, relay user equipment or terminals in future evolved PLMNs, etc.
  • the relay user equipment may be, for example, a 5G residential gateway (RG).
  • the user equipment may be a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self-driving, or telemedicine.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the type or type of terminal equipment.
  • the user equipment may also include end-side equipment, such as local switch (LSW), and/or customer premise equipment (CPE), etc., or the user equipment may access the network through LSE or CPE.
  • end-side equipment such as local switch (LSW), and/or customer premise equipment (CPE), etc.
  • LSE local switch
  • CPE customer premise equipment
  • the UE registered in the network can be understood as a user.
  • One of the UEs can correspond to a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. That is, when the terminal device is installed with a SIM card, the terminal device corresponds to a user UE. When the terminal device is installed with multiple SIM cards, the terminal device corresponds to Multiple user UE.
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • network equipment refers to equipment that can provide wireless access functions for terminals.
  • the network equipment can support at least one wireless communication technology, such as long term evolution (LTE), new radio (NR), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), etc.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • NR new radio
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • the network device may include a core network (CN) device, and the core network device may include, for example, an AMF or the like.
  • CN core network
  • (wireless) access network equipment can be used to provide network access functions for authorized user equipment in a specific area, and can use transmission tunnels of different qualities according to the level of user equipment, service requirements, etc.
  • (R)AN can manage wireless resources, provide access services to user equipment, and then complete the forwarding of control signals and user equipment data between user equipment and the core network.
  • (R)AN can also be understood as a base station in a traditional network.
  • the access network device in the embodiment of the present application may be any communication device with wireless transceiver functions used to communicate with user equipment.
  • the access network equipment includes but is not limited to: NR New Generation Radio Access Network (NG-RAN), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (RNC) ), Node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, HeNB, or home Node B, HNB), Baseband unit (BBU), access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) in a wireless fidelity (WIFI) system, or Transmission and reception point (TRP), etc.
  • 5G such as NR, gNB in the system, or transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group (including multiple) of base stations in the 5G system Antenna panel) antenna panel, or it can also be a network node that constitutes
  • gNB may include centralized units (CUs) and DUs.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • CU implements some functions of gNB
  • DU implements some functions of gNB.
  • CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer functions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implementing the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the access network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into access network equipment in the access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU can be divided into access network equipment in the core network (core network, CN). This application does not Make limitations.
  • User plane network element used for packet routing and forwarding and quality of service (QoS) processing of user plane data.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the user plane network element may be a user plane function (UPF) network element.
  • UPF user plane function
  • user plane network elements can still be UPF network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • Data network element used to provide a network for transmitting data.
  • the data network element may be a data network (DN) network element.
  • DN data network
  • data network elements can still be DN network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • Authentication server used to perform user security authentication.
  • the authentication server may be an authentication server function (AUSF).
  • AUSF authentication server function
  • Access management network element mainly used for mobility management and access management.
  • the access management network element can be the access and mobility management function (AMF), which mainly performs functions such as mobility management and access authentication/authorization.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • PCF policy control function
  • Session management network element Mainly used for session management, Internet protocol (IP) address allocation and management of user equipment, selection of endpoints for manageable user plane functions, policy control and charging function interfaces, and downlink data notification, etc. .
  • IP Internet protocol
  • the location management network element can be used to provide positioning services for terminal devices.
  • Location management network elements are such as location management function (LMF) network elements.
  • LMF location management function
  • the session management network element can be a session management function (SMF) network element, which completes terminal IP address allocation, UPF selection, accounting and QoS policy control, etc.
  • SMF session management function
  • the application network element can be an application function (AF) network element, which represents the application function of a third party or operator. It is the interface for the 5G network to obtain external application data and is mainly used for Convey the requirements from the application side to the network side.
  • AF application function
  • Unified data management network element responsible for the management of user identification, contract data, authentication data, and user service network element registration management.
  • the unified data management network element may be unified data management (UDM).
  • Policy control network element including user subscription data management function, policy control function, charging policy control function, QoS control, etc., a unified policy framework used to guide network behavior, which is the control plane functional network element (such as AMF, SMF network element, etc.) ) provides policy rule information, etc.
  • control plane functional network element such as AMF, SMF network element, etc.
  • the policy control network element may be the PCF.
  • Network function repository function network element Provides storage and selection functions for network function entity information for other core network elements.
  • the network element may be a network function repository function (NRF).
  • NEF network function repository function
  • the network open network element can be a network element function (NEF) network element, which is mainly used to expose the services and capabilities of 3GPP network functions to AF, and also allows AF to Provides information to 3GPP network functions.
  • NEF network element function
  • Network slice selection function network element responsible for selecting network slices for UE.
  • the application network element can be a network slice selection function (NSSF) network element.
  • NSSF network slice selection function
  • the above network elements or devices may still use their names in the 5G communication system, or may have other names, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the functions of the above network elements or devices can be completed by an independent network element, or can be completed by several network elements together.
  • network elements in the core network can be deployed on the same or different physical devices.
  • AMF and SMF can be deployed on the same physical device.
  • the network elements of the 5G core network can be deployed on the same physical device as the network elements of the 4G core network.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
  • the application network element can be an application function (AF) network element or an application server (Application Server, AS).
  • AF application function
  • AS Application Server
  • application network elements can still be AF network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • Figure 1A and Figure 1B show a schematic diagram of the fifth generation (5G) network architecture.
  • Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of the 5G network architecture under a non-service architecture
  • Figure 1B is a service-based architecture.
  • Schematic diagram of 5G network architecture under SBA Schematic diagram of 5G network architecture under SBA.
  • service-oriented architecture is the infrastructure of 5G network.
  • Servitization is mainly reflected in the control plane.
  • the essence of SBA is to define network functions as several "service” modules that can be flexibly called according to the three principles of "self-contained, reusable, and independent management.” Based on this, operators can flexibly customize the network according to business needs.
  • the interaction between network functions is implemented by service calls.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of an exemplary service-oriented architecture of a 5G network.
  • core network elements can communicate with other core network elements through service-oriented interfaces.
  • service-oriented interface corresponding to AMF is It is called Namf interface
  • Nlmf interface the interface corresponding to LMF
  • the 5G network architecture shown in Figure 1A and Figure 1B can include three parts, namely terminal, DN and operator network. The following is a brief introduction to the functions of some of the network elements.
  • the operator network may include but is not limited to one or more of the following network elements: AUSF, PCF, UDM, AF, AMF, SMF network elements, (R)AN) equipment, UPF, NSSF, etc.
  • network elements or equipment other than wireless access network equipment may be called core network elements or core network equipment.
  • the N1 interface is the signaling plane interface between the AMF and the UE. It is used to exchange signaling messages between the core network and the UE, such as the UE registering into the network, the UE establishing a PDU session, and the network side configuring the UE policy.
  • the N2 interface is the interface between AMF and RAN, and is used to transmit wireless bearer control information from the core network to the RAN.
  • the N3 interface is the interface between (R)AN and UPF and is used to transfer UE service data between RAN and UPF.
  • the N4 interface is the interface between SMF and UPF. It is used to transfer information between the control plane and the user plane, including the control plane terminal equipment completing the network access operation based on the contract information with the operator.
  • the N6 interface is the interface between UPF and DN, and is used to transmit UE service data between UPF and DN.
  • N5 interface is the interface between PCF and AF.
  • the N7 interface is the interface between PCF and SMF and is used to deliver PDU session granularity and service data flow granularity control policies.
  • the N8 interface is the interface between AMF and UDM. It is used by AMF to obtain access and mobility management-related subscription data and authentication data from UDM, and for AMF to register UE's current mobility management-related information with UDM.
  • the N9 interface is the interface between two UPFs.
  • the N9 interface is the interface between the intermediate UPF (intermediate UPF, I-UPF) and the UPF as the PDU session anchor (PSA).
  • I-UPF intermediate UPF
  • PSA PDU session anchor
  • the N10 interface is the interface between SMF and UDM. It is used by SMF to obtain session management-related subscription data from UDM, and by SMF to register UE current session-related information with UDM.
  • the N11 interface is the interface between SMF and AMF. It is used to transmit PDU session tunnel information between RAN and UPF, control messages sent to UE, and radio resource control information sent to RAN.
  • N12 interface including the interface between AMF and AUSF.
  • N13 interface including the interface between AUSF and UDM.
  • N22 interface including the interface between NSSF and AMF.
  • the above network elements or functions can be network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, or virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (for example, a cloud platform).
  • a platform for example, a cloud platform.
  • the above network element or function can be implemented by one device, or can be implemented by multiple devices together, or can be a functional module in one device, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the session management network element, user plane network element, and access management network element in this application can be the SMF, UPF, and AMF in Figure 1A respectively, or they can be used in future communications such as the sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) network.
  • the network elements with the functions of the above SMF, UPF, and AMF are not limited in this application.
  • SMF, UPF, and AMF are used as examples of the session management network element, the user plane network element, and the access management network element respectively for description.
  • the architecture may be extended based on the architecture shown in Figure 1A or Figure 1B.
  • the gateway mobile location center GMLC
  • the location retrieval function LRF
  • the location service (location service, LCS) client LCS client, LCS Client
  • LCS client LCS client
  • the LMF network element is mainly responsible for positioning request management, positioning resource allocation and determining the location of the terminal device during positioning services.
  • NL1 is the interface between AMF and LMF.
  • NL7 is the interface between LMF and LMF.
  • N52 is the interface between UDM and NEF.
  • NL2 is the interface between AMF and GMLC.
  • NL5 is the interface between NEF and GMLC.
  • N33 is the interface between NEF and AF.
  • N51 is the interface between AMF and NEF.
  • Typical scenarios in wide-area scenarios include smart IoT (for example, elderly positioning, pet tracking, etc.).
  • Typical scenarios in local positioning scenarios include intelligent manufacturing Manufacturing (for example, personnel location management, material location management, etc.), smart chemical industry (for example, personnel location management, electronic fences, one-click alarm, etc.), smart supermarkets (for example, product push and smart operations, customer flow, etc.) Analysis and shopping mall management, navigation shopping guide and parking car search, etc.).
  • 5G positioning service enhancement research location services, LCS
  • Positioning business continuity when the positioned device is moving is crucial for positioning applications. That is, when the positioned device is moving, the positioning process can still be guaranteed to proceed smoothly and higher accuracy can still be obtained with lower latency.
  • the device location information is used to continue to assist positioning applications in making relevant decisions and processing.
  • the scenario in which the positioned device (taking UE as an example) moves within the 5G system can be subdivided into three scenarios:
  • the UE is in the connection management connection state (Connection Management-connected, CM-connected) and the radio resource control connection state (Radio Resource RRC-connected) mobile scenario.
  • the source base station needs to pass the UE positioning related information (positioning related information) through the UE. Relevant signaling is sent to the target base station.
  • the UE positioning related information includes parameters and/or configurations used to position the terminal device.
  • the UE positioning related information may include (requested) channel sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) transmission characteristic information (requested SRS transmission characteristics/SRS transmission characteristics) and the identifier of the LMF (or routing ID).
  • the routing identifier may be the identifier of the LMF serving the UE when the UE performs positioning services at the source base station.
  • the identifier of LMF is a mandatory (M) cell.
  • the identifier of the LMF in the UE positioning related information may expire, causing the positioning service to fail.
  • inventions of the present application provide a communication method.
  • the communication method can be implemented based on the architecture shown in Figure 1A or Figure 1B.
  • the method may be implemented by a first access management network element, a second location management network element and a second access network device.
  • terminal equipment and “user equipment (User Equipment, UE)” in this application can be replaced with each other.
  • a communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
  • the first access management network element receives the first message sent by the second access network device, where the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device.
  • the first access network device may be an access network device (last serving RAN/last serving gNB) that transmits data or signaling or signals for the terminal device before moving to the second access network device.
  • the first access network device may be the source access network device (source NG-RAN/source gNB) of the terminal device.
  • the first access network device stores context information (UE context) of the terminal device.
  • the first access network device stores context information of the terminal device, and also has an N2 connection/NGAP connection with the AMF registered with the terminal device.
  • the second access network device may be an access network device currently transmitting data or signaling or signals for the terminal device.
  • the second access network device may be a target access network device (target NG-RAN/target gNB). "The terminal equipment moves from the first access network equipment to the second access network equipment" can also be replaced by "after the terminal equipment moves from the first access network equipment to the second access network equipment".
  • the movement of the terminal device from the first access network device to the second access network device can be understood as: the terminal device initiates an RRC connection request at the second access network device; or, the terminal device initiates an RRC connection request at the second access network device; Initiate/send an RRC recovery request (RRC resume); or, the terminal device sends an RRC recovery request (RRC resume) to the second access network device; or, the terminal device sends a measurement report (measurement report) to the second access network device; Or, the terminal device sends a handover confirmation (handover confirm) to the second access network device.
  • the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and the first positioning information.
  • the first location management network element (such as LMF) is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device.
  • the positioning information may also be called terminal device-related positioning information or positioning protocol data unit (PDU).
  • PDU positioning protocol data unit
  • the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device and receive the positioning information of the terminal device sent from the first access network device.
  • the identity of the first location management network element can be carried in the positioning information of the terminal device.
  • the second access network device may obtain the identity of the first location management network element from the positioning related information of the terminal device, and carry the identity of the first location management network element in the first message. It can be understood that since the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device, even if the first location management network element sends the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, the first access network device It is also impossible to send positioning information to the terminal device because the identification of the first location management network element has expired, or the terminal device has moved to the second access network device, and the service range of the first location management network element cannot cover the second location. Access network equipment, resulting in positioning service failure.
  • the first positioning information can be used to position the terminal device.
  • the first positioning information may include configurations for positioning the terminal device, such as parameters for positioning the terminal device.
  • the first positioning information may include New Wireless Positioning Protocol A (NR Positioning Protocol A, NRPPa) PDU and/or LTE Positioning Protocol Data Unit (LTE Positioning Protocol, LPP PDU). It can be understood that the positioning information of the terminal device in this application includes first positioning information.
  • the terminal device may move from the first access network device to the second access network device.
  • the second access network device may be an access network device currently providing services to the UE.
  • “can be an access network device currently providing services to the UE” can be understood as: the UE accesses (accesses to) the second access network device and receives data and/or signaling from the second access network device; or , the UE is attached (camped on) to the second access network device and receives data and/or signaling from the second access network device; or, the UE is within the signal coverage of the second access network and receives data from the second access network device.
  • the network access device receives signaling and/or signals or sends signals and/or signaling to the second access network device; or the UE receives data and/or signaling and/or signals from the second access network device or sends signals to the second access network device.
  • the second access network device sends data and/or signaling and/or signals.
  • the access management network element may be an AMF.
  • the location management network element may be an LMF.
  • the identity of the location management network element can be any of the following: routing ID, LMF ID, Network Instance ID, NF instance ID, IP address, Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) ), Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), Uniform Resource Locator (URL), global address of the LMF (global address of the LMF), FQDN, etc.
  • Access network equipment can be any of the following: NG-RAN, Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) equipment; future access network systems, such as 6G access network equipment.
  • the first message of this application may be uplink UE associated positioning transmission (uplink UE associated NRPPa transport) or may be uplink non-UE related positioning transmission uplink non UE associated NRPPa transport).
  • the NRPPa protocol data unit of this application can be any of the following: positioning information (Positioning Information), positioning information request (Positioning Information Request), positioning information update (Positioning Information Update), positioning information reply (Positioning Information Response), positioning information failure (Positioning Information Failure), Positioning Activation Request, Positioning Activation Response, Positioning Activation Failure, Positioning Deactivation.
  • the first message may also be a path switch request (path switch request) message or a handover notification (handover notify) message or a handover required (handover required) message or a UE context creation message (Namf_Communication_CreateUEContext).
  • the first access management network element determines the second location management network element, and the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device
  • the second location management network element is used to provide location services for the terminal device located in the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and receive the positioning information of the terminal device sent from the second access network device; or, the second location management network element uses The second location management network element is configured to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device and receive positioning information related to the terminal device sent from the second access network device; or, the second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device. Send positioning information related to the terminal device.
  • the location management network element that provides services to the UE may change. For example, after the UE moves from the first access network device to the second access network device, the current location of the UE (for example, the base station where the UE is located or the tracking area identity (TAI) of the cell to which the UE is located) is not in the first access network device.
  • the service area of the first location management network element can be understood as the TAI list (TAI list) served by the first location management network element or the service range can be understood as the first location management network element One or more tracking areas (Tracking Area, TA) of the service.
  • the current location of the UE can be served by the second location management network element (for example, the UE moves to the service range of the second location management network element), and the core network device (such as the first access management network element) can determine the new location management network element.
  • the location management network element ie, the second location management network element
  • the location management network element provides location/positioning services for the UE.
  • "UE moves from the first access network device to the second access network device” can be understood as: the UE can send data/signal/signaling on the second access network device and receive data sent by the second access network device. Data/signal/signaling; alternatively, the UE may receive data/signal/signaling sent by the second access network device.
  • the first access management network element may determine that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device based on the location information (User Location Information, ULI) of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element may determine that the location management network element of the terminal device needs to be changed based on the location information of the terminal device, that is, it is determined that the location management network element that provides location services for the terminal device needs to be changed.
  • the first access management network element may determine a new location management network element (eg, a second location management network element) based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the location information of the terminal device may include the identity of the second access network device where the terminal device is located or the cell ID (cell ID) of the second access network device where the terminal device is located, or may include other information that can be used to identify the terminal device.
  • Location information such as latitude and longitude coordinates or TAI, etc.
  • the identification of the access network equipment includes, for example, NG-RAN ID or radio access network node identification (RAN node ID/gNB ID).
  • the first access management network element may also receive a fourth message from the second access network device.
  • the four messages may include location information of the terminal device.
  • the fourth message can be used for path switching (for example, the fourth message is a path switch request message), for notifying a switch (for example, the fourth message is a handover notify message), or for requesting a switch.
  • the fourth message is a handover required message
  • the fourth message is a UE context creation message (Namf_Communication_CreateUEContext)).
  • the first message may also include the location information of the terminal device.
  • the first message may be a fourth message.
  • the first message may be used for path switching (for example, the first message is a path switching request message), for notifying switching (for example, the first message is a switching notification message), or for requesting switching (for example, the first message is a switching notification message). requirement message), or used to request the creation of a context of the terminal device (for example, the first message is a UE context creation message).
  • the first access management network element may be based on the location information of the terminal device and the service range information of the first location management network element (such as access network equipment and/or cells provided by the first location management network element), It is determined that the terminal device is not within the service range of the first location management network element, so it is determined to change the location management network element or to select a new location management network element or to select the second location management network element.
  • the service scope information of the first location management network element may be information stored in the first access management network element, for example, local configuration (local configuration/locally configured) in the first access management network element.
  • the service scope of the first location management network element may also be information obtained by the first access management network element from other network elements (such as NRF).
  • the first access management network element may determine the second location management network element based on the configuration or policy information. For example, according to the policy information, when the terminal device moves to the second access network device, it needs to change to the second location. Manage network elements.
  • the first access management network element may determine the second location management network element based on the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device.
  • the first access management network element may determine that the location management network element is changed from the first location management network element to the second location management network element according to the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device, or, The first access management network element may select the second location management network element based on the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device, or the first access management network element may select the second location management network element based on the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device. It is determined that the location management network element is changed to the second location management network element.
  • the first access management network element can establish/store/generate/record the corresponding relationship between the first location management network element and the second location management network element.
  • the corresponding relationship may be expressed as a corresponding relationship between the identifier of the first location management network element and the identifier of the second location management network element.
  • the corresponding relationship may be expressed as a mapping relationship between the first location management network element identifier and the second location management network element identifier.
  • the corresponding relationship can be expressed as a corresponding relationship between the first location management network element configuration (LMF profile) and the second location management network element configuration.
  • the corresponding relationship may be expressed as a corresponding relationship between the identifier of the terminal device, the identifier of the first location management network element, and the identifier of the second location management network element.
  • the first access management network element may determine the second location management network element through the location management network element change process.
  • the first access management network element may send a message to the first location management network element, and the message may carry the identifier of the terminal device and the location information of the terminal device (such as the identifier of the second access network device and/or At least one of the cell identifier of the second access network device) or the identifier of the second location management network element.
  • the first access management network element may determine a location that supports providing services for the location of the terminal device based on the location information of the terminal device. Set up the management network element as the second location management network element, and carry the identifier of the second location management network element in the message.
  • the first location management network element can select the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device. Subsequently, the location context of the terminal device may be exchanged between the first location management network element and the second location management network element, and the second location management network element may communicate with the first access management network element or the second access network. The device sends a change notification, indicating that the location management network element of the terminal device has changed.
  • the first access management network element may also determine that the terminal device has positioning-related information or positioning information. Otherwise, if the terminal device does not have positioning-related information, execution of S302 and subsequent processes can be ignored.
  • the positioning-related information can be used to indicate the presence of positioning services related to the terminal device.
  • the positioning-related information is called first information. It can be understood that the first information is a kind of information related to the positioning service of the terminal device that can be obtained by core network elements (for example, AMF, LMF, SMF, UDM, NRF, etc.).
  • determining that the UE has the first information may refer to based on the UE context of the terminal device (UE context), the UE's registration information (registration information), subscription information (subscription information), mobility management context (mobility management Context (MM context), session management context (Session Management context, SM context) or UE-related information stored in the access management network element determines that the first information exists.
  • the first information may include any one or more of the following: location service correlation ID (LCS correlation ID), location context, location deferred reference number (LDR reference). number), location QoS (location QoS) information, location processing ID (for example, NRPPa transaction ID), LTE positioning protocol processing ID (LPP Transaction ID).
  • the first access management network element sends a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the second access network device.
  • the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, an identity of the second access network device, a cell identity and a first indication, wherein the cell belongs to the second access network device or
  • the second access network equipment includes the cell.
  • the second location management network element can obtain the first positioning information sent by the second access network device. Therefore, the second location management network element can subsequently provide positioning service services for the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service. performance to avoid failure of the terminal device’s positioning service.
  • the second location management network element may determine the second access network device based on the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device, and obtain positioning information related to the terminal device from the second access network device. Therefore, , the second location management network element can subsequently provide positioning service services for the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and avoid failure of the positioning service for the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element may determine the second access network device according to the first indication and the identity and/or cell identity of the second access network device, and obtain information related to the terminal device from the second access network device. Therefore, the second location management network element can subsequently provide the positioning service of the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and avoid the failure of the positioning service of the terminal device.
  • the second location management network element can learn that the access network device of the terminal device has changed according to the first instruction, and the second location management network element can obtain the change from the first access management network element through the first access management network element.
  • the second access network device obtains positioning information related to the terminal device. Therefore, the second location management network element can subsequently provide positioning service services for the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and avoid failure of the positioning service for the terminal device.
  • the first indication may be used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed (serving NG-RAN node changed) or the first indication is used to indicate handover completion (handover complete notification/handover complete indication) or to indicate handover (handover notification) /handover indication) or used to indicate mobility completion (mobility completion) or used to indicate that the access network device providing services for the UE is changed to the second access network device or used to indicate the UE to switch to the second access network device or use Instructing the UE to move to the second access network device.
  • handover completion handover complete notification/handover complete indication
  • mobility completion mobility completion
  • the second message also includes a second indication.
  • the second indication may be used to indicate that the location management network element has been changed.
  • the second indication may be used to indicate that the location management network element of the UE has been changed to the second location management network element.
  • the identification and/or cell identification of the second access network device may be used to determine or select the third access network device.
  • the third access network device may be an access network device used to locate a terminal device, or the third access network device may be an access network device adjacent to the second access network device. Among them, the determination method of the third access network device and the description of the third access network device will be described below, which will not be described here.
  • the first indication and/or the second indication in this application may be a cause, an indication, or a notification, etc., where the cause, indication, or notification may be of enumerated type (enumerated/enum) or bit type ( bit) or boolean or character type (string) field.
  • the cause, indication, or notification may be of enumerated type (enumerated/enum) or bit type ( bit) or boolean or character type (string) field.
  • it can be carried out by whether to carry the second indication; for another example, when the field corresponding to the second indication takes the value When it is a specific value, it indicates the corresponding function of the second instruction.
  • the first indication can also be determined by whether it carries the first indication, or when the value of the field corresponding to the first indication is a specific value, it indicates the function corresponding to the first indication.
  • the second message in this application may adopt a newly defined message type or an existing message type.
  • the second message may be an N2 information notification message (Namf_Communication_N2InfoNotify/Namf_Communication_NonUeN2InfoNotify).
  • the second message may be a location context transfer message (Nlmf_LocationContextTransfer).
  • the second message may be a subscription notification message (Namf_EventExposure_Notify).
  • the second message may be an event notification (Namf_Location_EventNotify).
  • the second message may be an N1N2 message.
  • the second message may be N1 message notification (Namf_Communication_N1MessageNotify).
  • the third message is used to notify that the location management network element has changed.
  • the third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: One: the identification of the first location management network element and a second indication, where the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  • the identifier of the second location management network element is as described above for the identifier of the location management network element, and will not be described again here.
  • the second access network device can learn the changed information of the location management network element.
  • the third message can include the identification of the second location management network element, so the second access network device can The identity of the first location management network element that provides positioning services for the terminal device is replaced/updated with the identity of the second location management network element. Therefore, the second access network device subsequently sends a first message to the first access management network element.
  • the first message carries the positioning information of the terminal device and may also carry the identifier of the second location management network element.
  • the incoming management network element can send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second position management network element according to the identification of the second position management network element to ensure that the positioning information reaches the second position management network element, thereby ensuring the continuity of the positioning service and avoiding terminal The device's positioning service failed.
  • the third message may be an N2 message.
  • the third message may also be a path switch request ACK message.
  • the third message may also be a request from the access management network element (for example, AMF) to the access network. Message sent by a device (e.g., RAN).
  • a device e.g., RAN
  • the following describes the corresponding processes in which the first access management network element sends the second message and the third message in S303 in the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second location management network element can obtain the third information included in the second message by receiving the second message. Positioning information, or positioning information related to the terminal device is obtained from the second access network device according to the identity and/or cell identity of the second access network device included in the second message.
  • the second location management network element may send the fifth message to the first access management network element.
  • the fifth message includes an identification of the second location management network element and/or a third indication, wherein the third indication may be used to indicate that the location management network element has changed. Therefore, based on the fifth message, the first access management network element can learn that the location management network element has been changed to the second location management network element.
  • the first access management network element may send the third message according to the fifth message.
  • the fifth message may also include at least one of the following information: second positioning information, identification of the second location management network element, positioning service identification (LCS correlation ID or LDR reference number), third indication, terminal device Identity (UE ID) and terminal context identification (UE context ID).
  • the terminal device identifier may include, for example, user permanent identifier (subscription permanent identifier, SUPI), general public subscription identifier (GPSI), international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), temporary Mobile subscriber identity (temporary mobile subscriber identity, TMSI) or NG application layer protocol (NG application protocol, NGAP) UE ID.
  • the third message may also include at least one of the positioning service identifier, the terminal device identifier, and the terminal context identifier, wherein at least one of the positioning service identifier, the terminal device identifier, and the terminal context identifier may come from the fifth message. information.
  • the combination of the positioning service identifier and the terminal device identifier can be used to uniquely identify a positioning service of a terminal device.
  • the terminal context identifier or terminal device identifier can also be used to indicate a positioning service of a terminal device. For example, when the terminal device has only one positioning service, the terminal device identifier or terminal context identifier can also indicate a positioning service of a terminal device.
  • the second positioning information may be a positioning activation request.
  • the first positioning information includes a positioning configuration (which may be recorded as a first configuration)
  • the second positioning information may include indicating activation of the first configuration included in the first positioning information. It can be understood that the positioning information of the terminal device in this application includes second positioning information.
  • the second location management network element may perform the positioning service or positioning session of the UE according to the first positioning information.
  • the first positioning information in this application may include a positioning request and/or a first configuration
  • the first configuration may be an SRS configuration (SRS configuration) and/or a position reference signal (position reference signal, PRS). ) configuration (PRS configuration).
  • the second location management network element can position the UE according to the positioning request and/or positioning configuration, send the second positioning information to the first access management network element, and then the first access management network element sends the second positioning information to The second access network device triggers the second access
  • the network device positions the UE, and the second positioning information may be a positioning activation request (positioning activation request).
  • the first configuration may be determined by the second access network device according to the first parameter.
  • the first parameter may be obtained by the second access network device from the first access network device.
  • the UE moves to the second access network device or the UE initiates RRC resume (RRC resume) at the second access network device, and the second access network device receives the first parameter from the first access network device.
  • the first parameter includes requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristics (requested SRS transmission characteristics) information and/or requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristics (requested PRS transmission characteristics) information.
  • the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristics can be used to determine the SRS configuration.
  • the requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristics may be used to determine the PRS configuration.
  • the second location management network element can learn the access network device serving the UE.
  • the second location management network element may also determine/select the third access network device according to the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device.
  • the second location management network element may also send the positioning service related information of the UE (including but not limited to the first positioning information) to the third access network device, so that the third access network device can perform positioning according to the first positioning information. Position the UE.
  • the third access network device may be determined/selected based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the third access network device may be an adjacent access network device of the second access network device.
  • the adjacent access device may be an access network device that directly has an Xn connection, an IP connection, or an X2 connection with the second access network device.
  • the third access network device may not be an adjacent access network device to the second access network device, and an adjacent access network device that is not the second access network device may not be directly connected to the second access network device. Access network equipment with Xn connection, IP connection or X2 connection exists.
  • the second message may be a message in the process of changing the location management network element, such as a location context transfer request (Nlmf_Location_LocationContextTransfer request).
  • the second message may include the identification of the first access management network element, but not the first location. information.
  • the fifth message may include a third instruction for notifying the location management network element that the change process has been completed.
  • the first access management network element may further send a request to the second access network after receiving the third instruction.
  • the device sends a third message, used to notify the second access network device of a change in the location management network element, for example, used to notify the terminal device that the location management network element has been changed to the second location management network element.
  • the second location management network element may also select the second access network device based on the cell identifier, or in other words, the second access network device may be the second location management network The element is selected based on the identity of the first access network device and/or the cell identity.
  • the second location management network element may sense that the location management network element has changed. For example, the second location management network element may generate the aforementioned third indication according to the second indication, and the third indication is used to notify the location management network element of changes.
  • notifications can be replaced with instructions.
  • the first access network device can learn that the location management network element serving the UE has changed based on the third message/ has been changed, so the identity of the first location management network element can be replaced/updated with the identity of the second location management network element.
  • the second access network device sends the UE's positioning information (which may include a positioning request and/or positioning configuration (such as a first configuration or a second configuration different from the first configuration)) to the first access management network element
  • the identifier of the second location management network element is carried instead of the identifier of the first location management network element to avoid positioning failure caused by expiration of the location management network element.
  • the first access management network element can Receive the first message carrying the identity of the first location management network element and the first positioning information, and determine the second location management network element, wherein the second location management network element can be used to provide terminals located in the second access network device.
  • the device provides location services or the second location management network element may be used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the second access network device may send at least one of the first positioning information, the identification of the second access network device, the first indication or the cell identification to the second location management network element, and the second location management network
  • This element processes the positioning service of the UE to avoid failure of the positioning service due to changes in the location management network element after the terminal device moves. Therefore, the continuity and reliability of the positioning service can be improved.
  • the first access management network element may send the third message to the second access network device, so that the second access network device learns that the location management network element has been changed, so that the second access network device is replaced/updated with the UE Information about the location management network element of the service. For example, the identity of the first location management network element can be replaced/updated with the identity of the second location management network element to avoid positioning caused by changes in the location management network element after the terminal device moves. business failure to improve the continuity and reliability of positioning business.
  • the access management network element (for example, AMF) of the UE may also change.
  • the first access management network element in Figure 3 can be understood as a changed or modified or replaced access management network element in this scenario (for example, it can be called a target access management network element or it can be called a target access management network element.
  • new AMF newly selected access management network element
  • the access management network element change process can also be executed.
  • the access management before the change will be The network element is called the second access management network element.
  • the first access management network element may send a sixth message to the second access management network element, and the sixth message may be used to extract the UE context.
  • the first access management network element may determine that the UE has first information based on the UE context extracted from the second access management network element.
  • the sixth message may be UE context transfer (Namf_Communication_UEContextTransfer).
  • the explanation of the first information is as above. The above will not be repeated here.
  • the first information includes at least one of a positioning service identifier, a positioning context, a positioning delay reference identifier, positioning QoS information, a positioning processing identifier, and an LTE positioning protocol processing identifier.
  • the first access management network element may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element to indicate that the access management network element has been changed.
  • the identifier of the access management network element is carried in the message used to represent the replacement of the access management network element.
  • the first access management network element may also send the identifier of the first access management network element and the positioning service identifier to the first location management network element or the second location management network element.
  • the identity of the access management network element and the identity of the positioning service are carried in messages related to the terminal device.
  • the identification of the access management network element described in this application can be any one or more of the following: AMF ID, network function instance identification, IP address, UUID, URI, globally unique AMF identifier (GUAMI), URL, global address of the AMF (global address of the AMF) or FQDN, etc.
  • the first access management network element may also send a seventh message to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, and the seventh message may be used to indicate that the access management network element has changed.
  • the seventh message may carry an indication indicating that the access management network element has been changed.
  • the seventh message may include an event report message.
  • the event report may be used for the terminal device to report periodic or triggered positioning events.
  • the seventh message may include an N1 information notification message (Namf_Communication_N1MessageNotify), which is used to notify the UE of related N1 messages.
  • the seventh message may adopt an existing message type.
  • the seventh message includes an N1 information notification message or an event report message.
  • the seventh message can also adopt a new message type without limitation.
  • the first access management network element may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, so that the first location management network element or the second location management network element can
  • the second location management network element updates the terminal's positioning context in a timely manner to ensure that the access management network element identifier in the positioning context is the latest access management network element identifier, so that the positioning service of the terminal device can be continued and avoid errors caused by the access management network element.
  • the identity expires, causing the location management network element to send messages to the access management network element, but the message is sent to the wrong access management network element, causing the positioning service to fail.
  • the first access management network element may also send the identification of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identification to the first location management network element or the second location management network element to indicate the terminal device corresponding to the first access management network element. and/or services, therefore the positioning context of the terminal device or the positioning context can also be updated according to the identity of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identity.
  • the access network device as the base station
  • the terminal device as the UE
  • the access management network element as the AMF
  • the location management network element as the LMF
  • the AMF serves as the first access network device.
  • the AMF can switch according to the N2 path.
  • the location information of the terminal device included in the request determines whether the LMF needs to be replaced.
  • the AMF can also change the location information from the target base station.
  • the NRPPa PDU is forwarded to the second LMF, allowing the second LMF to process the NRPPa PDU.
  • this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • S401 The base station/serving base station (last serving gNB) of the UE in the RRC-inactive state that performs periodic positioning occurs.
  • the terminal device moves from the source base station to the target base station.
  • the source base station may correspond to the first access network device in the above method embodiment, and the target base station may correspond to the second access network device.
  • RRC resume RRC resume
  • the RRC recovery message includes the identity of the UE.
  • the identity of the UE may be an inactive network temporary identifier (inactive rradio network temporary identifier, I-RNTI).
  • the target base station requests the source base station to extract UE-related information.
  • the target base station may send a retrieve UE context request (retrieve UE context request) to the source base station.
  • UE related information may include UE context.
  • the source base station can be determined based on the I-RNTI. For example, the source base station identifier carried in the I-RNTI.
  • the source base station sends UE-related information to the target base station.
  • the UE-related information may include UE positioning-related information.
  • the UE positioning related information may include SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information, and the identity of the first LMF.
  • the SRS parameter information may be channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information.
  • PRS The parameter information may be positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information.
  • the identity of the first LMF is also the identity of the first LMF that provides positioning services for the UE when the UE performs positioning services at the source base station.
  • the source base station may send a retrieve UE context response (retrieve UE context response) to the target base station, which includes UE-related information.
  • the target base station determines the SRS configuration and/or the PRS configuration according to the SRS parameter information and/or the PRS parameter information to reduce the positioning delay and maintain positioning service continuity.
  • the UE can continue to send uplink SRS signals and/or the base station can continue to send downlink PRS signals to continue positioning measurements.
  • N2 path switch request N2path switch request
  • AMF Access Management Function
  • the location information of the UE may include the identification of the target base station (RAN ID) and may also include the identification of the cell where the UE is located (cell ID).
  • RAN ID the identification of the target base station
  • cell ID the identification of the cell where the UE is located
  • AMF receives the N2 path switching request.
  • the fourth message described in the above method embodiment may include the N2 path switching request in S406.
  • the AMF finds that the UE has positioning related information, and the AMF determines that the LMF needs to be changed or a new LMF needs to be selected.
  • the positioning-related information here may refer to the first information.
  • the first information can be found in the foregoing description.
  • the AMF may determine that the LMF needs to be changed, select a new LMF, determine a new LMF, or determine a target LMF based on the UE's location information, or determine that the first LMF cannot support positioning the UE.
  • the AMF may determine that the LMF needs to be changed or select a new LMF based on the local configuration information.
  • the local configuration information may be information configured by the operator. For example, when the UE moves to the base station, the LMF needs to be reselected or the LMF needs to be replaced.
  • the AMF may determine that the LMF needs to be changed or select a new LMF based on the policy information. For example, according to the policy configuration, when the UE moves to the base station, the LMF needs to be reselected or the LMF needs to be replaced.
  • the AMF retains the identity of the first LMF.
  • keep (keep) can also be replaced by storage or not deleted.
  • retaining the identity of the first LMF can be understood as: when the UE performs positioning services at the source base station, the AMF can obtain the positioning information of the UE, which may include the identity of the first LMF. In this case, the AMF retains the identity of the first LMF.
  • the identifier of the LMF includes at least one of the LMF ID, network function instance identifier, routing identifier, IP address, UUID, URI, URL, global address, and FQDN.
  • the AMF triggers the LMF change process and selects a new LMF for the UE to perform positioning services, for example, selects the second LMF.
  • the first LMF sends the positioning context of the UE to the second LMF.
  • the AMF stores the corresponding relationship between the first LMF and the second LMF, for example, the corresponding relationship or mapping relationship between the identifier of the first LMF and the identifier of the second LMF.
  • storage can also be replaced by generating or determining or recording.
  • N2 path switch reply N2 path switch request ACK
  • the target base station sends the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission to the AMF.
  • the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission may include NRPPa PDU.
  • the NRPPa PDU may carry the updated SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration (that is, the SRS configuration updated in S405).
  • the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission may also carry a routing identifier, that is, the identifier of the first LMF.
  • the first message in S301 may include the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission in S412.
  • the AMF determines the identity of the second LMF based on the correspondence between the identity of the first LMF and the identity of the second LMF.
  • the AMF determines the second LMF based on the corresponding relationship between the first LMF and the second LMF; or maps the identity of the first LMF to the identity of the second LMF.
  • S302 may include the steps shown in S413.
  • the AMF sends the N2 message notification message carrying the above NRPPa PDU to the second LMF.
  • the message also includes one or more of the following information: information used to indicate that the LMF has changed (i.e., the aforementioned example of the second indication), UE The identity of the cell where the user is located, the identity of the target base station, a handover notification or indication (ie, an example of the foregoing first indication), and a handover completion notification or indication (ie, an example of the foregoing first indication).
  • the AMF can wait for the LMF change to be completed before sending the message carrying the above NRPPa PDU.
  • the positioning-related information here refers to the first information.
  • first letter Please refer to the above description for information.
  • the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed may be a reason, an indication, a notification, etc.
  • the reason or indication or notification may be data of enumeration type or bit type or Boolean type or character type, which is used to indicate that the second LMF notifies the LMF that the LMF has changed.
  • the second message in S303 may include the N2 message notification message.
  • the second LMF may determine to send the information indicating or notifying the LMF that the LMF has changed to the target base station based on the information that instructs the second LMF to notify the LMF that the LMF has changed or that the LMF has changed.
  • the second LMF sends an N1N2 message transfer (Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer) to the AMF, which can carry NRPPa PDU.
  • N1N2 message transfer (Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer)
  • the N1N2 message transmission also includes information indicating that the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed.
  • the information that the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed may be the identification of the second LMF; or may be the identification of the second LMF. identification and indication/notification that the LMF has been replaced or that the LMF has been replaced.
  • the NRPPa PDU in S416 and the NRPPa PDU in S412 can be different.
  • the NRPPa PDU in S412 can be positioning information update (positioning information update)
  • the NRPPa PDU in S416 can be positioning activation request (positioning activation request).
  • the fifth message in the above method embodiment may include the N1N2 message transmission.
  • AMF sends downlink UE associated NRPPa transport to the target base station, which carries NRPPa PDU, information indicating that the LMF has changed, or information indicating that the LMF has changed, where the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed.
  • the information may be the identification of the second LMF; or may be the identification of the second LMF and an indication or notification that the LMF has been replaced (ie, an example of the aforementioned third indication).
  • the NRPPa PDU is the NRPPa PDU from the second LMF in step S416.
  • the target base station receives the information that the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed, and may update/replace the identity of the first LMF with the identity of the second LMF.
  • the target base station may also send the identifier of the second LMF to the source base station/anchor base station/last base station serving the UE (last serving gNB/RAN).
  • the third message in S303 may include the downlink UE-related NRPPa transmission.
  • the AMF can forward the NRPPa PDU from the target base station to the second LMF, so that the second LMF processes the NRPPa PDU to avoid the failure of the positioning service of the terminal device and improve the continuity of the positioning service.
  • step shown in S409 can be executed after the AMF receives the N2 path switching request in S406.
  • S410 can be executed after S409 completes the replacement of the LMF. There is no strict time limit between S411 and S409 or S410. S411 can be executed before S409 or S410. That is to say, when AMF sends the N2 path switching reply shown in S411, S410 may not be completed yet.
  • S412 may be executed after receiving the N2 path switching reply in S411, may be executed after S405 is executed and before S406 is executed, or may be executed after S406 is executed but before the N2 path switching reply in S411 is received.
  • the AMF receives the NRPPa PDU from the target base station and determines the LMF that provides positioning services for the UE from the first LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned first location management After the network element) is changed to the second LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned second location management network element), the identifier of the second LMF is sent to the target base station. Subsequently, the target base station can send the identifier of the second LMF and the NRPPa PDU, so that the second LMF processes the NRPPa PDU.
  • this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • S501-S513 are the same as S401-S413 and will not be described again.
  • the AMF sends the N2 message to the target base station.
  • the N2 message may include the identity of the second LMF, or the identity of the second LMF and at least one of the following information: the identity of the first LMF and information indicating that the LMF has changed or that the LMF has changed.
  • the change or LMF change information may be, for example, an indication/notification of the LMF change/update/change.
  • the N2 message may be, for example, a UE-related N2 message.
  • the UE-related N2 message may be a downlink UE-related NRPPa transmission.
  • the N2 message can also be a new message, e.g. specifically used to notify LMF of changes.
  • the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed may be a reason, a notification, an instruction, etc.
  • the cause or notification or indication may be an enumeration type or a bit type or a character type or a Boolean type, etc., which is used to indicate that the LMF has changed or changed.
  • the third message in S303 may include the N2 message in S514.
  • S515 The target base station replaces or updates the identity of the first LMF with the identity of the second LMF according to the above N2 message.
  • the target base station may update the positioning-related information of the terminal device and replace or update the identity of the first LMF with the identity of the second LMF.
  • the target base station sends the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission to the AMF.
  • the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission may include NRPPa Identification of the PDU and second LMF.
  • the AMF sends an N2 message notification message to the second LMF according to the identifier of the second LMF, including the NRPPa PDU. Therefore, the UE-related NRPPa PDU can be processed by the second LMF.
  • the AMF can send the identifier of the second LMF to the target base station.
  • the target base station can replace or update the identifier of the first LMF with the identifier of the second LMF. Therefore, the target base station can subsequently send the NRPPa PDU of the terminal device to arrive.
  • the second LMF enables the second LMF to process the NRPPa PDU to avoid the failure of the positioning service of the terminal device and improve the continuity of the positioning service.
  • the AMF After receiving the N2 path switching request from the target base station, the AMF temporarily does not send an N2 path switching reply to the target base station.
  • the AMF determines that the LMF that provides positioning services for the UE has been changed from the first LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned first location management network element) to the second LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned second location management network element), it sends the second LMF to the target base station.
  • LMF identifies the N2 path switch reply.
  • the target base station can send the identifier of the second LMF and the NRPPa PDU, so that the second LMF processes the NRPPa PDU.
  • this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • S601 to S607 are the same as S401 to S407 in the process shown in Figure 4 and will not be described again.
  • the N2 path switching reply includes the identification of the second LMF, or includes the identification of the second LMF and at least one of the following information: the identification of the first LMF and the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed, the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed.
  • the information that the LMF has been changed may be an indication or notification that the LMF has been replaced.
  • the second LMF is the changed LMF or the second LMF is the LMF newly selected by the AMF.
  • the third message in S303 may include the N2 path switching reply.
  • S610 to S612 are the same as S515 to S517 in the process shown in Figure 5 and will not be described again.
  • the target base station determines that the terminal device has positioning-related information, and carries the NRPPa PDU and the identity of the first LMF in the N2 path switching request sent to the AMF. That is to say, in this example, the first message carries the first positioning information and the identity of the first LMF.
  • this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • S701 to S705 are the same as S401 to S405 in the process shown in Figure 4 and will not be described again.
  • the target base station determines/discovers that the UE has positioning-related information.
  • the positioning-related information may include at least one of the LMF identification, SRS parameter information, and PRS parameter information.
  • the target base station can determine whether the UE has positioning-related information based on the UE-related information sent by the source base station. For example, the UE related information from the source base station may include positioning related information, and then the target base station determines that the UE has positioning related information.
  • the target base station sends an N2 path switching request to the AMF, which carries the NRPPa PDU and the identity of the first LMF.
  • the NRPPa PDU may carry the updated SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration (that is, the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration determined in S705).
  • S407 to S417 shown in FIG. 4 may be executed, or S507 to S517 shown in FIG. 5 may be executed, or S607 to S612 shown in FIG. 6 may be executed.
  • the source base station sends the UE positioning-related information to the target base station.
  • the target base station determines that the terminal device has positioning-related information, and sends the NRPPa PDU and The logo of the first LMF.
  • the UE interacts with the NG-RAN (for example, the source base station) and the core network equipment (such as the first LMF) to perform a periodic positioning process. After the periodic positioning process ends, the UE can still remain in the connected state.
  • the NG-RAN for example, the source base station
  • the core network equipment such as the first LMF
  • the UE can still remain in the connected state.
  • the measurement report may include a neighbor cell measurement signal strength list of the UE, and the source base station selects the base station where the target cell is located based on the neighbor cell list for handover.
  • the source base station sends a handover request to the target base station, which carries the UE's PDU session-related information and positioning-related information.
  • positioning-related information includes SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information.
  • the SRS parameter information may include requested SRS transmission characteristic information.
  • the PRS parameter information may include requested PRS transmission characteristic information.
  • the handover request may also include the identification of the first LMF.
  • the handover request may also include an NRPPa processing identifier and/or an LPP processing identifier.
  • the first parameter in this application may include the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or the requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information in S803.
  • the target base station determines the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration according to the SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information.
  • the first configuration in this application may include the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration in S804.
  • the target base station sends a handover request reply (handover request ACK) to the source base station.
  • handover request ACK handover request reply
  • the handover request reply may include SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
  • the source base station sends an RRC message, such as an RRC reconfiguration message, to the UE, which carries SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
  • RRC message such as an RRC reconfiguration message
  • S406 shown in Figure 4 and the actions after the process shown in Figure 4 can be executed, or the actions after S506 and after in the process shown in Figure 5 can be executed, or the actions after S606 and after in the process shown in Figure 6 can be executed, or the actions after S606 in the process shown in Figure 7 can be executed. Actions after S706 in the process shown.
  • the source base station when the terminal device moves from the source base station to the target base station, the source base station sends the first parameter to the AMF through the handover required message, and then the AMF sends the third parameter through the handover request.
  • a parameter is sent to the target base station, so that the target base station can obtain the first parameter.
  • the target base station may also determine the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration according to the first parameter, and send the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration to the AMF through a handover request ACK.
  • AMF can also send SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration to the source base station through handover command.
  • the target base station determines that the terminal device has positioning-related information, and sends the NRPPa PDU and the identity of the first LMF to the AMF.
  • S901 to S902 are the same as S801 and S802 in the process shown in Figure 8 and will not be described again.
  • the source base station sends a handover requirement message to the AMF, which carries the UE's PDU session-related information and positioning-related information.
  • positioning-related information includes SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information.
  • the SRS parameter information may include requested SRS transmission characteristic information.
  • the PRS parameter information may include requested PRS transmission characteristic information.
  • the switching requirement may also include the identification of the first LMF.
  • the handover requirement may also include an NRPPa processing identifier and/or an LPP processing identifier.
  • the first parameter in this application may include the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or the requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information in S903.
  • the AMF sends a handover request to the target base station.
  • the handover request carries the UE's PDU session related information and positioning related information.
  • the handover request may also include at least one of the identification of the first LMF, the NRPPa processing identification, and the LPP processing identification.
  • the target base station determines the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration according to the SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information.
  • the first configuration in this application may include the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration in S905.
  • S906 The target base station sends a handover request reply to the AMF.
  • the handover request reply may include SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
  • the first message in S301 may include the handover request reply in S906.
  • the AMF sends a handover command to the source base station, which may include SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
  • the source base station sends an RRC message, such as an RRC reconfiguration message, to the UE, which may carry SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
  • RRC message such as an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the UE sends a handover confirmation (handover confirm) to the target base station, that is, the UE accesses the target base station.
  • the target base station sends a handover notification (handover notify) to the AMF, carrying the information of the target cell.
  • the AMF may trigger changes to the LMF after receiving the notification, such as performing step S409 in Embodiment 1.
  • S409 shown in FIG. 4 and the actions after S409 in the process shown in FIG. 4 may be executed, or the actions after S509 and thereafter in the process shown in FIG. 5 may be executed, or the actions after S608 and subsequent steps in the process shown in FIG. 6 may be executed.
  • the target base station can obtain the requested SRS transmission characteristic information and/or the requested PRS transmission characteristic information for determining the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration, without the need for the target After moving, the base station obtains the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration from the LMF to reduce the positioning service delay.
  • the source base station can also obtain the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration determined by the target base station, so that the source base station updates the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
  • the AMF used for the movement of the UE and providing services for the UE is changed from the second AMF to the first AMF.
  • a possible process of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is as follows:
  • S1001 is the same as S801 shown in Figure 8 and will not be described again.
  • the registration request may be triggered by a periodic registration process, or may be triggered by the terminal device moving out of the registration area.
  • the registration request may include the identification of the terminal device.
  • the registration request may also include a registration type, for example, the registration type may be initial registration or periodic registration.
  • the registration request can also be carried With AMF selection auxiliary information, this information is used to assist the base station in AMF selection.
  • the base station here is the base station where the UE is located after moving, such as the target base station.
  • S1004 The base station performs AMF selection and determines the first AMF.
  • the base station can select AMF according to local configuration.
  • the base station may also select an AMF based on the AMF selection assistance information.
  • the first AMF selected by the base station is the new AMF.
  • the base station sends a registration request message to the selected first AMF to request registration of the UE, which includes the UE's identity.
  • the first AMF determines the second AMF according to the identity of the UE.
  • the UE's identity may include information about the AMF (that is, the second AMF) that allocates the identity to the UE.
  • the GUTI includes an AMF pointer, which can be used to determine the second AMF.
  • the first access management network element in the above method embodiment includes the first AMF here
  • the second access management network element includes the second AMF here.
  • the first AMF sends a UE context transfer request message (Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer) to the second AMF for requesting the UE context of the UE.
  • UE context transfer request message (Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer)
  • the second AMF sends a UE context transfer request reply message (Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer Response) to the first AMF, which may include the UE context of the UE.
  • a UE context transfer request reply message (Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer Response)
  • the first AMF may obtain the UE context of the UE.
  • the sixth message in this application may include the UE context transmission request reply message.
  • the first AMF determines that the UE has positioning-related information according to the UE context.
  • the positioning-related information here may refer to the first information mentioned above.
  • the first AMF may determine that the UE has at least one of the positioning service identifier, positioning context, positioning delay reference identifier, positioning QoS information, and positioning processing identifier based on the UE context, and then determines that the UE has positioning-related information.
  • S1010 The first AMF sends the seventh message to the LMF.
  • the seventh message may be used to indicate that the access management network element has changed.
  • the seventh message may be used to indicate that the access management network element has changed. It may be understood that the seventh message itself has this function; or it may be understood that the seventh message may It is an existing message, but the information element it carries has the function of display and/or implicit indication.
  • the explicit indication may be an identification that carries the new AMF, and the implicit indication may be an indication/notification of AMF change.
  • the seventh message may include the identification of the new AMF, and the seventh message may also include the positioning service identification.
  • the seventh message may include an N1 information notification message and/or an event report message.
  • the LMF receives the seventh message and updates the positioning context of the UE.
  • the LMF can update the AMF identity previously stored in the positioning context to the current AMF identity.
  • a subsequent positioning process for the terminal device can be triggered based on periodic positioning events.
  • the LMF in S1011 may be the first location management network element or the second location management network element described in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the target AMF ie, the replaced AMF
  • the LMF of the location service such as the first LMF or the second LMF. If the LMF is changed, that is, from the first LMF to the second LMF, the AMF can notify the second LMF of the location information of the UE through a message.
  • the location information of the UE may include the identity of the base station where the UE is located (for example, the target base station) and/or the identity of the cell where the UE is located, etc.
  • the message can be an N2 message notification or other message.
  • the second LMF may receive the location information of the UE and select an appropriate neighboring base station of the UE to send the first positioning information according to the location information of the UE.
  • the first positioning information includes updated SRS and/or PRS configuration information to enable The access network equipment performs positioning measurements on the UE.
  • the communication device provided by the embodiments of the present application includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules that perform each function.
  • the units and method steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in this application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software driving the hardware depends on the specific application scenarios and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • Figures 11 and 12 are schematic structural diagrams of possible communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the first access management network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device may be a first access management network element, a second location management network element, or a second access network device, or may be a module in the first access management network element, a second location management network element, or a module in the first access management network element. The module in the second position management network element or the module in the second access network device.
  • the communication device 1100 shown in FIG. 11 includes a processing unit 1110 and a transceiver unit 1120.
  • the communication device 1100 is used to implement the functions of the first access management network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may be used to implement corresponding communication functions.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also be called a communication interface or a communication unit, and may include a sending unit and/or a receiving unit.
  • the processing unit 1110 may be used to implement corresponding processing functions.
  • the communication device 1100 further includes a storage unit, which can be used to store instructions and/or data, and the processing unit 1110 can read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the communication device 1100 implements each of the above.
  • Actions of the first access management network element such as the first AMF
  • the second location management network element such as the second LMF
  • the second access network device such as the target base station
  • the transceiver unit 1120 can receive the first message sent by the second access network device, where the first message includes the first location management The identification of the network element and the first positioning information, the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, wherein the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second Access network equipment.
  • the processing unit 1110 may also determine a second location management network element, which is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also send a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the first access network device.
  • the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device, and a first indication.
  • the cell belongs to the second access network device, and the first indication Used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed.
  • the third message is used to notify the location management network element that the location management network element has changed.
  • the third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: the third location management network element.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a fourth message, where the fourth message includes the location information of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1110 may also determine the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1110 may also determine based on the location information of the terminal device that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 sends the third message to the first access network device, and the transceiver unit 1120 can also receive the fifth message.
  • the fifth message includes at least one of the following information: the identifier of the second location management network element, the positioning service identifier, a third indication, the identifier of the terminal device, and the terminal context identifier.
  • the third indication is used to indicate the location management network element. already changed.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a sixth message from the second access management network element, where the sixth message is used to extract the UE context.
  • the processing unit 1110 may also determine that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element; or, the transceiver unit 1120 may also send the identifier of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element.
  • the first location management network element or the second location management network element sends the identifier of the first access management network element, the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also send a seventh message to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, where the seventh message is used to indicate that the access management network element has changed.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 can be used to receive a second message from the first access management network element, where the second message includes the third location management network element. At least one of positioning information, a cell identifier, an identifier of the second access network device, and a first indication, the cell belongs to the second access network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also be configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device.
  • the first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also send the first positioning information to a third access network device, which is the access network device selected by the second location management network element.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive the identity of the first access management network element; or the second location management network element receives the identity of the first access management network element, and the terminal The identification of the device and/or the identification of the positioning service.
  • the processing unit 1110 may also update the positioning context of the terminal device according to the identity of the first access management network element; or, the processing unit 1110 may also update the positioning context of the terminal device according to the identity of the first access management network element. , and the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier, and update the positioning context of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1110 can be used to determine the first configuration, where the first configuration includes a channel sounding reference signal configuration and/or a positioning reference signal configuration.
  • the terminal equipment moves from the first access network equipment to the second access network equipment.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may send a first message to the first access management network element.
  • the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and the first positioning information.
  • the first positioning information includes the first configuration, the first The location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a third message from the first access management network element.
  • the third message is used to notify the location management network element that the location management network element has changed.
  • the third message includes the The identifier of the second location management network element, or the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: the identifier of the first location management network element and a second indication, the second indication is used to indicate the location The management network element has changed.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a first parameter from the first access network device, where the first parameter includes the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or the requested positioning reference signal. Transfer characteristic information.
  • the processing unit 1110 may also determine the first configuration according to the first parameter.
  • the communication device 1200 shown in FIG. 12 includes a processor 1210 and an interface circuit 1220.
  • the processor 1210 and the interface circuit 1220 are coupled to each other.
  • the interface circuit 1220 may be a transceiver or an input-output interface.
  • the communication device 1200 may also include a memory 1230 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1210 or input data required for the processor 1210 to run the instructions or data generated after the processor 1210 executes the instructions.
  • the processor 1210 is used to realize the function of the above processing unit 1110
  • the interface circuit 1220 is used to realize the function of the above transceiver unit 1120.
  • processor in the embodiment of the present application can be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), or application-specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware or by a processor executing software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory In memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium well known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and storage media may be located in an ASIC.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the base station or terminal.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, which may include the first access management network element, the second location management network element, or the second access network device involved in the above embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment. Actions implemented by the first access management network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product.
  • the computer program product is used to store a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment by the first access management Actions implemented by the network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a chip, including a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and is used to call a program in the memory so that the chip implements the communication method provided by the above method embodiment.
  • the communication method is managed by the first access. Actions implemented by the network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a chip, which is coupled to a memory.
  • the chip is used to implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment. It is composed of a first access management network element, a second location management network element or a second access management network element. Actions implemented by network access equipment.
  • embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment that combines software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may employ computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk memory, disk memory, computer-usable program code) embodied therein. The form of a computer program product implemented on a CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.).
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that causes a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including the instruction means, the instructions
  • the device implements the functions specified in a process or processes of the flowchart and/or a block or blocks of the block diagram.
  • These computer program instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device, causing a series of operating steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing, thereby executing on the computer or other programmable device.
  • Instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in a process or processes of a flowchart diagram and/or a block or blocks of a block diagram.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a base station, a UE, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
  • the computer program or instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits via wired or wireless means to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media, such as floppy disks, hard disks, and tapes; optical media, such as digital video optical disks; or semiconductor media, such as solid-state hard drives.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be volatile or nonvolatile storage media, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile types of storage media.
  • “at least one” refers to one or more, and “plurality” refers to two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the related objects before and after are an “or” relationship; in the formula of this application, the character “/” indicates that the related objects before and after are a kind of "division” Relationship.

Abstract

The present application provides a communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: a first access management network element receives a first message sent by a second access network device, the first message comprising an identifier of a first location management network element and first positioning information, and the first location management network element being used for sending positioning information of a terminal device to a first access network device, wherein the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device; the first access management network element may further determine a second location management network element, the second location management network element being used for sending the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device; and the first access management network element may further send a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the first access network device. According to the solution, a positioning service of the terminal device can be processed by the second location management network element, so as to avoid positioning service failure caused by change of a location management network element, thereby improving positioning service continuity.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-references to related applications
本申请要求在2022年08月09日提交中华人民共和国知识产权局、申请号为202210952627.1、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application submitted to the Intellectual Property Office of the People's Republic of China on August 9, 2022, with application number 202210952627.1 and the application title "A communication method and device", the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference. Applying.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及移动通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of mobile communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
基于目前的终端设备(如用户设备(user equipment,UE))定位技术,UE在连接管理连接(connection management-connected,CM-connected)态以及无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)非激活(RRC-inactive)态下被定位时,由于UE移动会导致基站发生更换,因此,为了保证定位业务连续性并降低定位时延,源基站需要将UE定位信息(positioning information)通过UE相关的信令发送给目标基站,以保证UE的定位业务连续性。Based on the current terminal equipment (such as user equipment (UE)) positioning technology, the UE is in the connection management-connected (CM-connected) state and the radio resource control (RRC) inactive (RRC) state. -inactive) state, the base station will be replaced due to the movement of the UE. Therefore, in order to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and reduce the positioning delay, the source base station needs to send the UE positioning information (positioning information) through UE-related signaling. to the target base station to ensure the continuity of the UE's positioning service.
除此之外,由于UE的位置移动,除了基站可能会发生更换,为UE服务的AMF与LMF也可能发生改变,因此,为UE服务的AMF或LMF可能过期,导致定位业务失败,定位业务连续性无法保证。In addition, due to the movement of the UE, not only the base station may be replaced, but also the AMF and LMF serving the UE may change. Therefore, the AMF or LMF serving the UE may expire, causing the positioning service to fail and the positioning service to continue. Sex is not guaranteed.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种通信方法及装置,用以避免由于LMF改变导致定位业务失败,提高定位业务连续性。This application provides a communication method and device to avoid positioning service failure due to LMF changes and improve positioning service continuity.
第一方面,本申请提供一种通信方法。该通信方法可由接入管理网元或接入管理网元中的组件实施,组件例如处理器、收发器、处理模块或收发模块中的至少一种。接入管理网元可包括5G核心网网元,如接入与移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元。以执行主体是第一接入管理网元为例,该方法包括:第一接入管理网元接收第二接入网设备发送的第一消息,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息,其中,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备。第一接入管理网元还可确定第二位置管理网元,所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息。所述第一接入管理网元还可向所述第二位置管理网元发送第二消息,和/或,所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一接入网设备发送第三消息。其中,所述第二消息包括所述第一定位信息、小区标识、所述第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备,所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变。所述第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,所述第三消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。In a first aspect, this application provides a communication method. The communication method may be implemented by an access management network element or a component in the access management network element, such as at least one of a processor, a transceiver, a processing module or a transceiver module. Access management network elements may include 5G core network elements, such as access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements. Taking the execution subject being the first access management network element as an example, the method includes: the first access management network element receives a first message sent by the second access network device, where the first message includes the first location management network element The identification and the first positioning information, the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, wherein the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the 2. Access network equipment. The first access management network element may also determine a second location management network element, and the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device. The first access management network element may also send a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the first access network device. information. Wherein, the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device, and a first indication, and the cell belongs to the second access network device. , the first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed. The third message is used to notify that the location management network element has changed. The third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information. One: the identification of the first location management network element and a second indication, where the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
可选地,上述“第一接入管理网元接收第二接入网设备发送的第一消息,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息,其中,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备”可以替换为以下描述:Optionally, the above "first access management network element receives the first message sent by the second access network device, the first message includes the identity of the first location management network element and the first positioning information, and the first The location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, where the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" can be replaced by the following description:
“第一接入管理网元接收第二接入网设备发送的第一消息,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息”。"The first access management network element receives the first message sent by the second access network device, where the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and the first positioning information."
可选地,上述“第一接入管理网元还可确定第二位置管理网元,所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息”可以替换为以下描述:“第一接入管理网元还可确定第二位置管理网元”。Optionally, the above-mentioned "first access management network element may also determine a second location management network element, and the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device. " can be replaced by the following description: "The first access management network element can also determine the second location management network element."
可选地,上述“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息”可以替换为以下任意一种或多种描述:Optionally, the above "the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device" can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息和/或所述第一 位置管理网元用于接收来自第一接入网设备发送的所述终端设备的定位信息”。"The first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device and/or the first access network device to the first access network device. The location management network element is used to receive the positioning information of the terminal device sent from the first access network device."
“所述第一位置管理网元为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device."
“所述第一位置管理网元支持为第一接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the first access network device."
“所述第一位置管理网元支持为第一接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the first access network equipment."
“所述第一位置管理网元支持对所述终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向第一接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the first access network device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向第一接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the first access network equipment."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息和/或所述第一位置管理网元用于接收来自第一接入网设备发送的所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the first access network device and/or the first location management network element is used to receive information from the first access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
“所述第一位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device."
可选地,上述“所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息”可以替换为以下任意一种或多种描述:Optionally, the above "the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device" can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息和/或所述第二位置管理网元用于接收来自第二接入网设备发送的所述终端设备的定位信息”。"The second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive the positioning information sent from the second access network device. The positioning information of the terminal device”.
“所述第二位置管理网元为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device."
“所述第二位置管理网元支持为第二接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the second access network device."
“所述第二位置管理网元支持为第二接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the second access network equipment."
“所述第二位置管理网元支持对所述终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the second access network device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the second access network equipment."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息和/或所述第二位置管理网元用于接收来自第二接入网设备发送的所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive information from the second access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
“所述第二位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device."
基于第一方面所示方法,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备后,第一接入管理网元可接收携带有第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息的第一消息,并确定第二位置管理网元,其中,第二位置管理网元可用于为处于第二接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务。进一步的,第二接入网设备可将第一定位信息、第二接入网设备的标识、第一指示,或小区标识中的至少一个发送至第二位置管理网元,由第二位置管理网元处理UE的定位业务,避免发生移动后终端设备的定位业务由于位置管理网元发生变化导致定位连续性中断,进而带来定位失败,因此可以提高定位业务连续性。此外,第一接入管理网元可以将第三消息发送至第二接入网设备,使得第二接入网设备获知位置管理网元已变更,使得第二接入网设备更新为UE服务的位置管理网元的标识,例如,可由第二接入网设备将第一位置管理网元的标识更新为第二位置管理网元的标识,避免发生移动后终端设备的定位业务由于位置管理网元发生变化导致定位连续性终端,进而带来定位失败,以此来提高定位业务的连续性。Based on the method shown in the first aspect, after the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device, the first access management network element can receive the identifier and the first positioning carrying the first location management network element. The first message of the information and determines the second location management network element, wherein the second location management network element can be used to provide positioning services for the terminal device located in the second access network device. Further, the second access network device may send at least one of the first positioning information, the identification of the second access network device, the first indication, or the cell identification to the second location management network element, and the second location management The network element handles the positioning service of the UE and avoids positioning continuity interruption caused by changes in the location management network element after movement, thereby causing positioning failure. Therefore, positioning service continuity can be improved. In addition, the first access management network element may send the third message to the second access network device, so that the second access network device learns that the location management network element has changed, so that the second access network device updates the location serving the UE. The identity of the location management network element. For example, the second access network device can update the identity of the first location management network element to the identity of the second location management network element to avoid the positioning service of the terminal device due to the location management network element after the move. Changes lead to positioning continuity terminals, which in turn cause positioning failures, in order to improve the continuity of positioning services.
具体地,“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备”或者“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备后”可以理解为:Specifically, "the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" or "after the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" can be understood as:
终端设备可向第二接入网设备发送数据/信号/信令和/或接收来自第二接入网设备发送的数据/信号/信令。The terminal device may send data/signal/signaling to the second access network device and/or receive data/signal/signaling sent from the second access network device.
具体地,“所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变”可以理解为:所述终端设备移动至第二接入网设备;或者,可以理解为所述终端设备完成从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备;或者,可以理解为,所述终端设备切换至第二接入网设备。Specifically, "the first indication is used to indicate that the access network device has changed" can be understood as: the terminal device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood as that the terminal device completes the transition from the first access network device to the second access network device. The network access device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches to the second access network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二消息还包括第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。In a possible implementation, the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
基于该实现方式,第二消息还可包括第二指示,用于指示位置管理网元已改变。Based on this implementation, the second message may further include a second indication for indicating that the location management network element has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一接入管理网元还可接收第四消息,所述第四消息包括所述终端 设备的位置信息。所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元。In a possible implementation, the first access management network element may also receive a fourth message, where the fourth message includes the terminal Device location information. The first access management network element may also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
基于该实现方式,第一接入管理网元可根据第四消息中包括的终端设备的位置信息,确定第二位置管理网元。Based on this implementation manner, the first access management network element can determine the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device included in the fourth message.
可选地,“所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元”,可以替换为下述任意一种描述:Optionally, "the first access management network element can also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device" can be replaced by any of the following descriptions:
“所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定选择所述第二位置管理网元”;"The first access management network element can also determine and select the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device";
“所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息选择所述第二位置管理网元”。"The first access management network element may also select the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device."
具体地,“所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元”可以理解为:Specifically, "the first access management network element can also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device" can be understood as:
所述第一接入管理网元可以根据第二位置管理网元的服务区域以及终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元,例如,当第二位置管理网元的信息本地配置(locally configured)在第一接入管理网元中或者第一接入管理网元从NRF中获得了第二位置管理网元的服务区域信息。可选地,所述第一接入管理网元还可以根据策略信息(policy)以及终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元,例如,当所述终端设备的位置信息包括第二接入网设备标识和/或第二接入网设备包含的小区标识时,根据策略,第一接入管理网元确定第二位置管理网元。The first access management network element may determine the second location management network element based on the service area of the second location management network element and the location information of the terminal device. For example, when the information of the second location management network element is locally configured ( locally configured) in the first access management network element or the first access management network element obtains the service area information of the second location management network element from the NRF. Optionally, the first access management network element may also determine the second location management network element based on policy information (policy) and the location information of the terminal device. For example, when the location information of the terminal device includes the second When the access network equipment identification and/or the cell identification included in the second access network equipment are determined, the first access management network element determines the second location management network element according to the policy.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第四消息用于路径切换、用于通知切换、用于请求切换,或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文。In a possible implementation, the fourth message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting creation of a context of the terminal device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一消息用于路径切换、用于通知切换、用于请求切换,或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文,所述第一消息还包括所述终端设备的位置信息。所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元;In a possible implementation, the first message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting to create a context of a terminal device, and the first message also includes the terminal device. location information. The first access management network element may also determine the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device;
基于该实现方式,第一接入管理网元可根据第一消息中包括的终端设备的位置信息,确定第二位置管理网元。Based on this implementation manner, the first access management network element can determine the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device included in the first message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息,确定所述第一位置管理网元无法支持对所述终端设备定位。In a possible implementation manner, the first access management network element may further determine based on the location information of the terminal device that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device.
基于该实现方式,第一接入管理网元可根据终端设备的位置信息,确定第一位置管理网元无法支持对所述终端设备定位,即需要改变为终端设备提供服务的位置管理网元。Based on this implementation, the first access management network element can determine based on the location information of the terminal device that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device, that is, the location management network element that provides services for the terminal device needs to be changed.
具体地,所述“所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述终端设备的位置信息,确定所述第一位置管理网元无法支持对所述终端设备定位”可以理解为:所述第一位置管理网元的服务区域无法覆盖所述终端设备的位置信息所表征的终端设备的当前位置,因此,所述第一位置管理网元无法支持对所述终端设备定位。Specifically, the "the first access management network element can also determine that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device based on the location information of the terminal device" can be understood as: The service area of the first location management network element cannot cover the current location of the terminal device represented by the location information of the terminal device. Therefore, the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一接入网设备发送所述第三消息,所述第一接入管理网元还可接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括以下信息中的至少一个:所述第二位置管理网元的标识、定位业务标识、第三指示、终端设备的标识、终端上下文标识,所述第三指示用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。In a possible implementation, the first access management network element sends the third message to the first access network device, and the first access management network element can also receive a fifth message, The fifth message includes at least one of the following information: the identity of the second location management network element, the positioning service identity, a third indication, the identity of the terminal device, and the terminal context identity. The third indication is used to indicate the location. The management network element has changed.
基于该实现方式,第二位置管理网元的标识和/或第三指示可用于确定为终端设备提供服务的位置管理网元已改变。定位业务标识、终端设备的标识和终端上下文标识中的至少一项可用于指示终端设备即终端设备的定位业务,其中,第三消息可根据第五消息确定。因此,接入网设备可根据来自于第一位置管理网元的第三消息获知位置管理网元的变更,和/或,或者变更的位置管理网元对应的终端设备和/或定位业务,而不需要从位置管理网元获知以上变更的信息,提高获知变更的位置管理网元对应的终端设备和/或定位业务的效率。Based on this implementation, the identity of the second location management network element and/or the third indication may be used to determine that the location management network element that provides services for the terminal device has changed. At least one of the positioning service identifier, the terminal device identifier, and the terminal context identifier may be used to indicate the terminal device, that is, the positioning service of the terminal device, wherein the third message may be determined based on the fifth message. Therefore, the access network device can learn the change of the location management network element according to the third message from the first location management network element, and/or, or the terminal equipment and/or positioning service corresponding to the changed location management network element, and There is no need to learn the above changed information from the location management network element, which improves the efficiency of the terminal equipment and/or positioning services corresponding to the location management network element that is informed of the change.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一接入管理网元还可接收来自于第二接入管理网元第六消息,所述第六消息用于提取UE上下文。所述第一接入管理网元还可根据所述UE上下文确定所述终端设备存在定位信息。In a possible implementation manner, the first access management network element may also receive a sixth message from the second access management network element, where the sixth message is used to extract the UE context. The first access management network element may also determine that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context.
基于该实现方式,第一接入管理网元可从第二接入管理网元获取第六消息,以获取UE上下文,并根据UE上下文确定终端设备存在定位信息,其中,第二接入管理网元可以是终端设备处于第一接入网设备时接入的接入管理网元。Based on this implementation, the first access management network element can obtain the sixth message from the second access management network element to obtain the UE context, and determine that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context, wherein the second access management network element The element may be an access management network element accessed when the terminal device is in the first access network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一接入管理网元还可向所述第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送所述第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,所述第一接入管理网元还可向所述第一位置管理网元或第 二位置管理网元发送所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识。In a possible implementation manner, the first access management network element may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element; or , the first access management network element may also provide the first location management network element or the third The second location management network element sends the identifier of the first access management network element, the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一接入管理网元还可向所述第一位置管理网元或所述第二位置管理网元发送第七消息,所述第七消息用于指示接入管理网元已改变。In a possible implementation, the first access management network element may also send a seventh message to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, where the seventh message is used to Indicates that the access management network element has changed.
基于该实现方式,第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元可获知接入管理网元已改变。Based on this implementation, the first location management network element or the second location management network element can learn that the access management network element has changed.
第二方面,本申请提供一种通信方法。该通信方法可由位置管理网元或位置管理网元中的组件实施,组件例如处理器、收发器、处理模块或收发模块中的至少一种。接入管理网元可包括5G核心网网元,如LMF。以执行主体是第二位置管理网元为例,该方法包括:第二位置管理网元接收来自于第一接入管理网元的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述第一定位信息、小区标识、所述第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备;所述第二位置管理网元还可用于向所述第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息,所述终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备。所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变。In a second aspect, this application provides a communication method. The communication method may be implemented by a location management network element or a component in the location management network element, such as at least one of a processor, a transceiver, a processing module or a transceiver module. Access management network elements may include 5G core network elements, such as LMF. Taking the execution subject being the second location management network element as an example, the method includes: the second location management network element receives a second message from the first access management network element, where the second message includes the first positioning information. , at least one of a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device and a first indication, the cell belongs to the second access network device; the second location management network element may also be used to provide information to the second access network device. The second access network device sends positioning information of the terminal device, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device. The first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed.
可选地,上述“所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息”可以替换为以下任意一种或多种描述:Optionally, the above "the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device" can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息和/或所述第二位置管理网元用于接收来自第二接入网设备发送的所述终端设备的定位信息”。"The second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive the positioning information sent from the second access network device. The positioning information of the terminal device”.
“所述第二位置管理网元为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device."
“所述第二位置管理网元支持为第二接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the second access network device."
“所述第二位置管理网元支持为第二接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the second access network equipment."
“所述第二位置管理网元支持对所述终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the second access network device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the second access network equipment."
“述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息和/或所述第二位置管理网元用于接收来自第二接入网设备发送的所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device and/or the second location management network element is used to receive information from the second access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
“所述第二位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备定位”。"The second location management network element is used to locate the terminal device."
“所述第二位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The second location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device."
具体地,“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备”或者“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备后”可以理解为:Specifically, "the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" or "after the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" can be understood as:
终端设备可向第二接入网设备发送数据/信号/信令和/或接收来自第二接入网设备发送的数据/信号/信令。The terminal device may send data/signal/signaling to the second access network device and/or receive data/signal/signaling sent from the second access network device.
具体地,“所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变”可以理解为:所述终端设备移动至第二接入网设备;或者,可以理解为所述终端设备完成从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备;或者,可以理解为,所述终端设备切换至第二接入网设备。Specifically, "the first indication is used to indicate that the access network device has changed" can be understood as: the terminal device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood as that the terminal device completes the transition from the first access network device to the second access network device. The network access device moves to the second access network device; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches to the second access network device.
所述第二位置管理网元还可向第一接入管理网元发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识和/或第三指示,所述第三指示用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。The second location management network element may also send a fifth message to the first access management network element, where the fifth message includes the identification of the second location management network element and/or a third indication, and the third The indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第五消息还包括以下中的至少一个信息:终端设备的标识、终端上下文标识、定位业务标识。In a possible implementation, the fifth message further includes at least one of the following information: an identification of the terminal device, a terminal context identification, and a positioning service identification.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二位置管理网元还可向第三接入网设备发送所述第一定位信息,所述第三接入网设备是所述第二位置管理网元选择的接入网设备。In a possible implementation, the second location management network element may also send the first positioning information to a third access network device, and the third access network device is the second location management network element. Access network equipment selected by the user.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第三接入网设备是所述第二位置管理网元根据所述第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识选择的接入网设备,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备。In a possible implementation, the third access network device is an access network device selected by the second location management network element according to the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device, so The cell belongs to the second access network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第三接入网设备包括所述第二接入网设备相邻接入网设备。In a possible implementation manner, the third access network device includes an access network device adjacent to the second access network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二消息还包括第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。In a possible implementation, the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二位置管理网元还可接收所述第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,所述第二位置管理网元接收所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识。In a possible implementation, the second location management network element may also receive an identification of the first access management network element; or, the second location management network element may receive the first access management network element. The identity of the network element, the identity of the terminal device and/or the identity of the positioning service.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二位置管理网元还可根据第一接入管理网元的标识更新所述终端 设备的定位上下文;或者,所述第二位置管理网元还可根据所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识,更新所述终端设备的定位上下文。In a possible implementation, the second location management network element may also update the terminal according to the identity of the first access management network element. The positioning context of the device; or, the second location management network element may also update the terminal according to the identity of the first access management network element, the identity of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identity. The device's positioning context.
第三方面,本申请提供一种通信方法。该通信方法可由接入网设备或接入网设备中的组件实施,组件例如处理器、收发器、处理模块或收发模块中的至少一种。接入网设备可包括无线接入网设备,如基站。以执行主体是第二接入网设备为例,该方法包括:第二接入网设备确定第一配置,所述第一配置包括信道探测参考信号配置和/或定位参考信号配置,终端设备从所述第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备。所述第二接入网设备还可向第一接入管理网元发送第一消息,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,所述第一定位信息包括所述第一配置,所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息。In a third aspect, this application provides a communication method. The communication method may be implemented by an access network device or a component in the access network device, such as at least one of a processor, a transceiver, a processing module or a transceiver module. Access network equipment may include wireless access network equipment, such as base stations. Taking the execution subject as the second access network device as an example, the method includes: the second access network device determines a first configuration, the first configuration includes a channel sounding reference signal configuration and/or a positioning reference signal configuration, and the terminal device determines from The first access network device moves to the second access network device. The second access network device may also send a first message to the first access management network element, where the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and first positioning information, where the first positioning information includes In the first configuration, the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device.
可选地,上述“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息”可以替换为以下任意一种或多种描述:Optionally, the above "the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device" can be replaced by any one or more of the following descriptions:
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息和/或所述第一位置管理网元用于接收来自第一接入网设备发送的所述终端设备的定位信息”。"The first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device and/or the first location management network element is used to receive the location information sent from the first access network device. The positioning information of the terminal device”.
“所述第一位置管理网元为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element provides positioning services for the terminal device."
“所述第一位置管理网元支持为第一接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element supports terminal device positioning for the first access network device."
“所述第一位置管理网元支持为第一接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element supports providing positioning services for terminal equipment of the first access network equipment."
“所述第一位置管理网元支持对所述终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element supports positioning of the terminal device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向第一接入网设备的终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device of the first access network device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向第一接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element is used to provide positioning services to the terminal equipment of the first access network equipment."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the first access network device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备相关的定位信息和/或所述第一位置管理网元用于接收来自第一接入网设备发送的所述终端设备相关的定位信息”。"The first location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the first access network device and/or the first location management network element is used to receive information from the first access network device Positioning information related to the terminal device sent”.
“所述第一位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备定位”。"The first location management network element is used to locate the terminal device."
“所述第一位置管理网元用于为所述终端设备提供定位服务”。"The first location management network element is used to provide positioning services for the terminal device."
具体地,“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备”或者“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备后”可以理解为:Specifically, "the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" or "after the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" can be understood as:
终端设备可向第二接入网设备发送数据/信号/信令和/或接收来自第二接入网设备发送的数据/信号/信令。The terminal device may send data/signal/signaling to the second access network device and/or receive data/signal/signaling sent from the second access network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二接入网设备还可接收来自于所述第一接入管理网元的第三消息,所述第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,所述第三消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。In a possible implementation, the second access network device may also receive a third message from the first access management network element, where the third message is used to notify the location management network element that the location management network element has changed. , the third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: the identifier of the first location management network element and the third Two indications, the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二接入网设备接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一参数,所述第一参数包括请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性信息和/或请求的定位参考信号传输特性信息。所述第二接入网设备还可根据所述第一参数确定所述第一配置。In a possible implementation, the second access network device receives a first parameter from the first access network device, where the first parameter includes requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or Requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information. The second access network device may also determine the first configuration according to the first parameter.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该装置可以是第一接入网设备或第一接入网设备中的模块。该装置具有实现上述第一方面的任意实现方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fourth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, which may be a first access network device or a module in the first access network device. The device has the function of implementing any implementation method of the above-mentioned first aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware, or it can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该装置可以是第二位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元中的模块。该装置具有实现上述第二方面的任意实现方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fifth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, which may be a second location management network element or a module in the second location management network element. The device has the function of implementing any implementation method of the above second aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware, or it can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该装置可以是第二接入网设备中的模块或第二接入网设备中的模块。该装置具有实现上述第三方面的任意实现方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a sixth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, which may be a module in the second access network device or a module in the second access network device. The device has the function of implementing any implementation method of the above third aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware, or it can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机指令,当该装置运行时,该处理器执行该存储器存储的计算机指令,以使该装置执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任意实现方法。 In a seventh aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the device is running, the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory to cause the device to execute Any implementation method in the above first to third aspects.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括用于执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任意实现方法的各个步骤的单元或手段(means)。In an eighth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including units or means (means) for executing each step of any implementation method in the above-mentioned first to third aspects.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括与存储器耦合的处理器,该处理器用于调用所述存储器中存储的程序,以执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任意实现方法。该存储器可以位于该装置之内,也可以位于该装置之外。且该处理器可以是一个或多个。In a ninth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including a processor coupled to a memory. The processor is configured to call a program stored in the memory to execute any implementation method in the above first to third aspects. . The memory may be located within the device or external to the device. And the processor can be one or more.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括处理器和接口电路,所述处理器用于通过接口电路与其它装置通信,并执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任意实现方法。该处理器包括一个或多个。In a tenth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including a processor and an interface circuit. The processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit and execute any implementation method in the above-mentioned first to third aspects. The processor includes one or more.
第十一方面,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当计算机程序或指令被通信装置运行时,使得上述第一方面至第三方面中的任意实现方法被执行。In an eleventh aspect, embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product. The computer program product includes a computer program or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are run by a communication device, any one of the above-mentioned first to third aspects is enabled. The implementation method is executed.
第十二方面,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得上述第一方面至第三方面中的任意实现方法被执行。In a twelfth aspect, embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, in which instructions are stored, and when run on a communication device, the instructions in the first to third aspects are implemented. Any implementation method of is executed.
第十三方面,本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统,包括:处理器,用于执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任意实现方法。In a thirteenth aspect, embodiments of the present application further provide a chip system, including: a processor configured to execute any implementation method in the above first to third aspects.
第十四方面,本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,包括用于执行上述第一方面任意方法的第一接入管理网元,以及包括用于执行上述第二方面任意方法的第二位置管理网元,或包括用于执行上述第三方面任意方法的第二接入网设备。In a fourteenth aspect, embodiments of the present application further provide a communication system, including a first access management network element for performing any of the methods of the first aspect, and a second location for performing any of the methods of the second aspect. The management network element may include a second access network device for performing any of the methods of the third aspect above.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 1A is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图1B为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 1B is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic architectural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic flow chart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by this application;
图12为本申请提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by this application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请实施例提供一种数据传输方法及装置。其中,方法和装置是基于同一发明构思的,由于方法及装置解决问题的原理相似,因此装置与方法的实施可以相互参见,重复之处不再赘述。本申请实施例的描述中,“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。本申请中所涉及的至少一个是指一个或多个;多个,是指两个或两个以上。另外,需要理解的是,在本申请的描述中,“第一”、“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性,也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。Embodiments of the present application provide a data transmission method and device. Among them, the method and the device are based on the same inventive concept. Since the principles of the method and the device to solve the problem are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and the repeated parts will not be repeated. In the description of the embodiments of this application, "and/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, alone There are three situations B. The character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship. At least one mentioned in this application refers to one or more; multiple refers to two or more. In addition, it should be understood that in the description of this application, words such as "first" and "second" are only used for the purpose of distinguishing the description, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance, nor can they be understood as indicating. Or suggestive order.
为了使本申请的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the purpose, technical solutions and advantages of the present application clearer, the present application will be described in further detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
为了便于理解本申请的技术方案,下面先对本申请所涉及的技术术语进行简单介绍。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of this application, the technical terms involved in this application are briefly introduced below.
以下对本申请实施例的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。Some terms used in the embodiments of this application are explained below to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.
1)用户设备,也称终端设备,是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以经(无线)接入网设备(radio access network,(R)AN)中的接入网设备(或者也可以称为接入设备)与一个或多个核心网(core network,CN)设备(或者也可以称为核心设备)进行通信。本申请中,用户设备与终端设备可以互相替换。1) User equipment, also called terminal equipment, is a device with wireless transceiver functions that can be accessed through the (wireless) access network equipment (radio access network, (R)AN) (or it can also be called An access device) communicates with one or more core network (CN) devices (or can also be called core devices). In this application, user equipment and terminal equipment can be replaced with each other.
用户设备也可称为接入终端、终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移 动设备、用户终端、用户代理或用户装置等。用户设备可以部署(deployed in)在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。用户设备可以是蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、智能电话(smart phone)、手机(mobile phone)、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等。或者,用户设备还可以是具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、无人机设备或物联网、车联网中的终端、第五代移动通信(5th-generation,5G)网络以及未来网络中的任意形态的终端、中继用户设备或者未来演进的PLMN中的终端等。其中,中继用户设备例如可以是5G家庭网关(residential gateway,RG)。例如用户设备可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。本申请实施例对终端设备的类型或种类等并不限定。User equipment may also be called an access terminal, terminal, subscriber unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile station. Mobile equipment, user terminals, user agents or user devices, etc. User equipment can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons, satellites, etc.). The user equipment may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a smart phone, a mobile phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) website, personal digital assistant (PDA), etc. Alternatively, the user equipment may also be a handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, a computing device or other device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a drone device or a terminal in the Internet of Things, the Internet of Vehicles, the fifth generation Mobile communication (5th-generation, 5G) networks and any form of terminals in future networks, relay user equipment or terminals in future evolved PLMNs, etc. The relay user equipment may be, for example, a 5G residential gateway (RG). For example, the user equipment may be a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self-driving, or telemedicine. Wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, and smart homes. Wireless terminals, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the type or type of terminal equipment.
所述用户设备还可以包括端侧设备,如本地交换机(local switch,LSW),和/或客户端设备(customer premise equipment,CPE)等,或者,用户设备可通过LSE或CPE接入网络。The user equipment may also include end-side equipment, such as local switch (LSW), and/or customer premise equipment (CPE), etc., or the user equipment may access the network through LSE or CPE.
在本申请实施例中注册入网的UE可以理解为用户。其中一个UE可以对应一个用户识别模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)卡,即当终端设备安装有一个SIM卡时,终端设备对应一个用户UE,当终端设备安装有多个SIM卡时,终端设备对应多个用户UE。In this embodiment of the present application, the UE registered in the network can be understood as a user. One of the UEs can correspond to a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. That is, when the terminal device is installed with a SIM card, the terminal device corresponds to a user UE. When the terminal device is installed with multiple SIM cards, the terminal device corresponds to Multiple user UE.
本申请中,网络设备,指可以为终端提供无线接入功能的设备。其中,网络设备可以支持至少一种无线通信技术,例如长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)、新无线(new radio,NR)、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)等。In this application, network equipment refers to equipment that can provide wireless access functions for terminals. Among them, the network equipment can support at least one wireless communication technology, such as long term evolution (LTE), new radio (NR), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), etc.
又如,网络设备可以包括核心网(CN)设备,核心网设备例如包括AMF等。For another example, the network device may include a core network (CN) device, and the core network device may include, for example, an AMF or the like.
在本申请中,(无线)接入网设备可用于为特定区域的授权用户设备提供入网功能,并能够根据用户设备的级别,业务的需求等使用不同质量的传输隧道。In this application, (wireless) access network equipment can be used to provide network access functions for authorized user equipment in a specific area, and can use transmission tunnels of different qualities according to the level of user equipment, service requirements, etc.
(R)AN能够管理无线资源,为用户设备提供接入服务,进而完成控制信号和用户设备数据在用户设备和核心网之间的转发,(R)AN也可以理解为传统网络中的基站。(R)AN can manage wireless resources, provide access services to user equipment, and then complete the forwarding of control signals and user equipment data between user equipment and the core network. (R)AN can also be understood as a base station in a traditional network.
示例性地,本申请实施例中的接入网设备可以是用于与用户设备通信的任意一种具有无线收发功能的通信设备。该接入网设备包括但不限于:NR新一代接入网(New Generation Radio Access Network,NG-RAN)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(home evolved NodeB,HeNB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseBand unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等。Illustratively, the access network device in the embodiment of the present application may be any communication device with wireless transceiver functions used to communicate with user equipment. The access network equipment includes but is not limited to: NR New Generation Radio Access Network (NG-RAN), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (RNC) ), Node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, HeNB, or home Node B, HNB), Baseband unit (BBU), access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) in a wireless fidelity (WIFI) system, or Transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR, gNB in the system, or transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group (including multiple) of base stations in the 5G system Antenna panel) antenna panel, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), etc.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是,接入网设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的接入网设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的接入网设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, gNB may include centralized units (CUs) and DUs. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). CU implements some functions of gNB, and DU implements some functions of gNB. For example, CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer functions. DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implementing the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer and physical (physical, PHY) layer. AAU implements some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and active antenna related functions. Since RRC layer information will eventually become PHY layer information, or transformed from PHY layer information, in this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by DU , or sent by DU+AAU. It can be understood that the access network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into access network equipment in the access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU can be divided into access network equipment in the core network (core network, CN). This application does not Make limitations.
用户面网元:用于分组路由和转发以及用户面数据的服务质量(quality of service,QoS)处理等。 User plane network element: used for packet routing and forwarding and quality of service (QoS) processing of user plane data.
在5G通信系统中,该用户面网元可以是用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元。在未来通信系统中,用户面网元仍可以是UPF网元,或者,还可以有其它的名称,本申请不做限定。In the 5G communication system, the user plane network element may be a user plane function (UPF) network element. In future communication systems, user plane network elements can still be UPF network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
数据网络网元:用于提供传输数据的网络。Data network element: used to provide a network for transmitting data.
在5G通信系统中,该数据网络网元可以是数据网络(data network,DN)网元。在未来通信系统中,数据网络网元仍可以是DN网元,或者,还可以有其它的名称,本申请不做限定。In the 5G communication system, the data network element may be a data network (DN) network element. In future communication systems, data network elements can still be DN network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
认证服务器:用于执行用户的安全认证。在5G通信系统中,该认证服务器可以是认证服务器功能网元(authentication server function,AUSF)。Authentication server: used to perform user security authentication. In the 5G communication system, the authentication server may be an authentication server function (AUSF).
接入管理网元:主要用于移动性管理和接入管理等。在5G通信系统中,该接入管理网元可以是接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF),主要进行移动性管理、接入鉴权/授权等功能。此外,还负责在终端与策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元间传递用户策略。Access management network element: mainly used for mobility management and access management. In the 5G communication system, the access management network element can be the access and mobility management function (AMF), which mainly performs functions such as mobility management and access authentication/authorization. In addition, it is also responsible for transmitting user policies between the terminal and the policy control function (PCF) network element.
会话管理网元:主要用于会话管理、用户设备的网络互连协议(internet protocol,IP)地址分配和管理、选择可管理用户平面功能、策略控制和收费功能接口的终结点以及下行数据通知等。Session management network element: Mainly used for session management, Internet protocol (IP) address allocation and management of user equipment, selection of endpoints for manageable user plane functions, policy control and charging function interfaces, and downlink data notification, etc. .
位置管理网元,可用于提供终端设备的定位服务。位置管理网元例如位置管理功能(location management function,LMF)网元。The location management network element can be used to provide positioning services for terminal devices. Location management network elements are such as location management function (LMF) network elements.
在5G通信系统中,该会话管理网元可以是会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元,完成终端IP地址分配,UPF选择,及计费与QoS策略控制等。In the 5G communication system, the session management network element can be a session management function (SMF) network element, which completes terminal IP address allocation, UPF selection, accounting and QoS policy control, etc.
应用网元:在5G通信系统中,该应用网元可以是应用功能(application function,AF)网元,表示第三方或运营商的应用功能,是5G网络获取外部应用数据的接口,主要用于传递应用侧对网络侧的需求。Application network element: In the 5G communication system, the application network element can be an application function (AF) network element, which represents the application function of a third party or operator. It is the interface for the 5G network to obtain external application data and is mainly used for Convey the requirements from the application side to the network side.
统一数据管理网元:负责用户标识、签约数据、鉴权数据的管理、用户的服务网元注册管理。在5G通信系统中,该统一数据管理网元可以是统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)。Unified data management network element: Responsible for the management of user identification, contract data, authentication data, and user service network element registration management. In the 5G communication system, the unified data management network element may be unified data management (UDM).
策略控制网元:包括用户签约数据管理功能、策略控制功能、计费策略控制功能、QoS控制等,用于指导网络行为的统一策略框架,为控制面功能网元(例如AMF,SMF网元等)提供策略规则信息等。Policy control network element: including user subscription data management function, policy control function, charging policy control function, QoS control, etc., a unified policy framework used to guide network behavior, which is the control plane functional network element (such as AMF, SMF network element, etc.) ) provides policy rule information, etc.
在5G通信系统中,该策略控制网元可以是PCF。In the 5G communication system, the policy control network element may be the PCF.
网络功能存储库功能网元:为其他核心网元提供网络功能实体信息的存储功能和选择功能。在5G通信系统中,该网元可以是网络功能存储库功能网元(network function repository function,NRF)。Network function repository function network element: Provides storage and selection functions for network function entity information for other core network elements. In the 5G communication system, the network element may be a network function repository function (NRF).
网络开放网元:在5G通信系统中,该网络开放网元可以是网络开放功能(network element function,NEF)网元,主要用于向AF暴露3GPP网络功能的业务和能力,同时也可以让AF向3GPP网络功能提供信息。Network open network element: In the 5G communication system, the network open network element can be a network element function (NEF) network element, which is mainly used to expose the services and capabilities of 3GPP network functions to AF, and also allows AF to Provides information to 3GPP network functions.
网络切片选择功能网元:负责为UE选择网络切片,在5G通信系统中,该应用网元可以是网络切片选择功能(network slice selection function,NSSF)网元。Network slice selection function network element: Responsible for selecting network slices for UE. In the 5G communication system, the application network element can be a network slice selection function (NSSF) network element.
在未来的通信系统,例如6G通信系统中,上述网元或设备仍可以使用其在5G通信系统中的名称,或者也可以有其它名称,本申请实施例对此不作限定。上述网元或设备的功能可以由一个独立网元完成,也可以由若干个网元共同完成。在实际部署中,核心网中的网元可以部署在相同或者不同的物理设备上。例如作为一种可能的部署,可以将AMF和SMF部署在同一个物理设备上。又例如,5G核心网的网元可以和4G核心网的网元部署在同一物理设备上。本申请实施例对此不作限定。In future communication systems, such as 6G communication systems, the above network elements or devices may still use their names in the 5G communication system, or may have other names, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application. The functions of the above network elements or devices can be completed by an independent network element, or can be completed by several network elements together. In actual deployment, network elements in the core network can be deployed on the same or different physical devices. For example, as a possible deployment, AMF and SMF can be deployed on the same physical device. For another example, the network elements of the 5G core network can be deployed on the same physical device as the network elements of the 4G core network. The embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
在5G通信系统中,该应用网元可以是应用功能(application function,AF)网元或者可以是应用服务器(Application Server,AS)。在未来通信系统中,应用网元仍可以是AF网元,或者,还可以有其它的名称,本申请不做限定。In the 5G communication system, the application network element can be an application function (AF) network element or an application server (Application Server, AS). In future communication systems, application network elements can still be AF network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
如图1A和图1B所示为第五代(5th generation,5G)网络架构示意图,其中,图1A为非服务化架构下的5G网络架构示意图,图1B为服务化架构(service-based architecture,SBA)下的5G网络架构示意图。其中,服务化架构是5G网络的基础架构。服务化主要体现在控制面。SBA的本质是按照“自包含、可重用、独立管理”三原则,将网络功能定义为若干个可被灵活调用的“服务”模块。基于此,运营商可以按照业务需求进行灵活定制组网。网络功能间的交互由服务调用实现,每个网络功能对外呈现通用的服务化接口,可被授权的网络功能或服务调用。如图1B所示为5G网络的一种示例性的服务化架构示意图,该架构中,核心网网元可通过服务化接口与其他核心网网元进行通信,例如,AMF对应的服务化接口被称为Namf接口,LMF对应的接口可称为Nlmf接口。 Figure 1A and Figure 1B show a schematic diagram of the fifth generation (5G) network architecture. Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of the 5G network architecture under a non-service architecture, and Figure 1B is a service-based architecture. Schematic diagram of 5G network architecture under SBA). Among them, service-oriented architecture is the infrastructure of 5G network. Servitization is mainly reflected in the control plane. The essence of SBA is to define network functions as several "service" modules that can be flexibly called according to the three principles of "self-contained, reusable, and independent management." Based on this, operators can flexibly customize the network according to business needs. The interaction between network functions is implemented by service calls. Each network function presents a common service-oriented interface to the outside world and can be called by authorized network functions or services. Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of an exemplary service-oriented architecture of a 5G network. In this architecture, core network elements can communicate with other core network elements through service-oriented interfaces. For example, the service-oriented interface corresponding to AMF is It is called Namf interface, and the interface corresponding to LMF can be called Nlmf interface.
图1A和图1B所示的5G网络架构中可包括三部分,分别是终端、DN和运营商网络。下面对其中的部分网元的功能进行简单介绍说明。The 5G network architecture shown in Figure 1A and Figure 1B can include three parts, namely terminal, DN and operator network. The following is a brief introduction to the functions of some of the network elements.
其中,运营商网络可包括但不限于以下网元中的一个或多个:AUSF、PCF、UDM、AF、AMF、SMF网元、(R)AN)设备、UPF以及NSSF等。上述运营商网络中,除无线接入网设备之外的网元或设备可以称为核心网网元或核心网设备。Among them, the operator network may include but is not limited to one or more of the following network elements: AUSF, PCF, UDM, AF, AMF, SMF network elements, (R)AN) equipment, UPF, NSSF, etc. In the above operator network, network elements or equipment other than wireless access network equipment may be called core network elements or core network equipment.
此外,图1A所示的部分通信接口包括:In addition, some of the communication interfaces shown in Figure 1A include:
N1接口,为AMF与UE之间的信令面接口,用于核心网与UE之间交换信令消息,如UE注册入网、UE建立PDU会话、网络侧配置UE策略等。The N1 interface is the signaling plane interface between the AMF and the UE. It is used to exchange signaling messages between the core network and the UE, such as the UE registering into the network, the UE establishing a PDU session, and the network side configuring the UE policy.
N2接口,为AMF与RAN之间的接口,用于传递核心网至RAN的无线承载控制信息等。The N2 interface is the interface between AMF and RAN, and is used to transmit wireless bearer control information from the core network to the RAN.
N3接口,为(R)AN与UPF之间的接口,用于在RAN和UPF之间传递UE业务数据。The N3 interface is the interface between (R)AN and UPF and is used to transfer UE service data between RAN and UPF.
N4接口,为SMF与UPF之间的接口,用于控制面与用户面之间传递信息,包括控制面终端设备根据与运营商的签约信息完成入网操作。The N4 interface is the interface between SMF and UPF. It is used to transfer information between the control plane and the user plane, including the control plane terminal equipment completing the network access operation based on the contract information with the operator.
N6接口,为UPF与DN之间的接口,用于在UPF和DN之间传递UE业务数据。The N6 interface is the interface between UPF and DN, and is used to transmit UE service data between UPF and DN.
N5接口,为PCF与AF之间的接口。N5 interface is the interface between PCF and AF.
N7接口,为PCF与SMF之间的接口,用于下发PDU会话粒度以及业务数据流粒度控制策略。The N7 interface is the interface between PCF and SMF and is used to deliver PDU session granularity and service data flow granularity control policies.
N8接口,为AMF与UDM间的接口,用于AMF向UDM获取接入与移动性管理相关签约数据与鉴权数据,以及AMF向UDM注册UE当前移动性管理相关信息等。The N8 interface is the interface between AMF and UDM. It is used by AMF to obtain access and mobility management-related subscription data and authentication data from UDM, and for AMF to register UE's current mobility management-related information with UDM.
N9接口,为两个UPF之间的接口。例如图1A所示,该N9接口为中间UPF(intermediate UPF,I-UPF)与作为PDU会话锚点(PDU session anchor,PSA)的UPF之间的接口。The N9 interface is the interface between two UPFs. For example, as shown in Figure 1A, the N9 interface is the interface between the intermediate UPF (intermediate UPF, I-UPF) and the UPF as the PDU session anchor (PSA).
N10接口,为SMF与UDM间的接口,用于SMF向UDM获取会话管理相关签约数据,以及SMF向UDM注册UE当前会话相关信息等。The N10 interface is the interface between SMF and UDM. It is used by SMF to obtain session management-related subscription data from UDM, and by SMF to register UE current session-related information with UDM.
N11接口,为SMF与AMF之间的接口,用于传递RAN和UPF之间的PDU会话隧道信息、传递发送给UE的控制消息、传递发送给RAN的无线资源控制信息等。The N11 interface is the interface between SMF and AMF. It is used to transmit PDU session tunnel information between RAN and UPF, control messages sent to UE, and radio resource control information sent to RAN.
N12接口,包括AMF与AUSF之间的接口。N12 interface, including the interface between AMF and AUSF.
N13接口,包括AUSF与UDM之间的接口。N13 interface, including the interface between AUSF and UDM.
N22接口,包括NSSF与AMF之间的接口。N22 interface, including the interface between NSSF and AMF.
可以理解的是,上述网元或者功能既可以是硬件设备中的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行软件功能,或者是平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能。可选的,上述网元或者功能可以由一个设备实现,也可以由多个设备共同实现,还可以是一个设备内的一个功能模块,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It can be understood that the above network elements or functions can be network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, or virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (for example, a cloud platform). Optionally, the above network element or function can be implemented by one device, or can be implemented by multiple devices together, or can be a functional module in one device, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application.
本申请中的会话管理网元、用户面网元、接入管理网元分别可以是图1A中的SMF、UPF、AMF,也可以是未来通信如第六代(6th generation,6G)网络中具有上述SMF、UPF、AMF的功能的网元,本申请对此不限定。在本申请的实施例中,以SMF、UPF、AMF分别作为会话管理网元、用户面网元、接入管理网元的一个举例进行描述。The session management network element, user plane network element, and access management network element in this application can be the SMF, UPF, and AMF in Figure 1A respectively, or they can be used in future communications such as the sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) network. The network elements with the functions of the above SMF, UPF, and AMF are not limited in this application. In the embodiment of the present application, SMF, UPF, and AMF are used as examples of the session management network element, the user plane network element, and the access management network element respectively for description.
当前技术规范提供的用于支撑定位服务的网络架构。该架构可以是在图1A或图1B所示架构的基础上进行扩展。例如在图2所示架构中,网关移动定位中心(gateway mobile location center,GMLC)可负责定位业务的定位请求处理,并为定位业务选择合适的AMF网元。位置提取功能(location retrieval function,LRF)可以与GMLC配置或单独配置,并且负责检索或验证UE的位置信息。定位服务(location service,LCS)客户端(LCS client,LCS Client)可以通过GMLC与LCS客户端之间的Le接口,向GMLC发送定位请求,以发起针对UE的定位服务。LMF网元主要负责定位业务时进行定位请求管理,定位资源调配以及确定终端设备的位置。The network architecture used to support location services provided by current technical specifications. The architecture may be extended based on the architecture shown in Figure 1A or Figure 1B. For example, in the architecture shown in Figure 2, the gateway mobile location center (GMLC) can be responsible for processing positioning requests for positioning services and selecting appropriate AMF network elements for positioning services. The location retrieval function (LRF) can be configured with the GMLC or separately, and is responsible for retrieving or verifying the UE's location information. The location service (location service, LCS) client (LCS client, LCS Client) can send a location request to the GMLC through the Le interface between the GMLC and the LCS client to initiate the location service for the UE. The LMF network element is mainly responsible for positioning request management, positioning resource allocation and determining the location of the terminal device during positioning services.
如图2所示,NL1为AMF与LMF之间的接口。NL7为LMF与LMF之间的接口。N52为UDM与NEF之间的接口。NL2为AMF与GMLC之间的接口。NL5为NEF与GMLC之间的接口。N33为NEF与AF之间的接口。N51为AMF与NEF的接口。As shown in Figure 2, NL1 is the interface between AMF and LMF. NL7 is the interface between LMF and LMF. N52 is the interface between UDM and NEF. NL2 is the interface between AMF and GMLC. NL5 is the interface between NEF and GMLC. N33 is the interface between NEF and AF. N51 is the interface between AMF and NEF.
随着智慧化浪潮的兴起,垂直行业对定位的需求日益迫切。3GPP版本(release)16中,引入了5G基站的定位功能。其应用场景主要分为两大类:广域定位场景和局域定位场景。广域场景里比较典型的场景包括智慧物联(例如,老人定位、宠物跟踪,等)。局域定位场景里比较典型的场景包括智能制 造(例如,人员的位置管理、物资的位置管理、等),智慧化工(例如,人员位置的管理、电子围栏、一键报警,等),智慧商超(例如,产品推送及智慧运营、客流分析及商场管理、导航导购及停车寻车,等)。鉴于上述背景,5G定位业务增强研究(location Services,LCS)成为一个关键研究课题。With the rise of intelligence, vertical industries have increasingly urgent needs for positioning. In 3GPP version (release) 16, the positioning function of 5G base stations was introduced. Its application scenarios are mainly divided into two categories: wide-area positioning scenarios and local-area positioning scenarios. Typical scenarios in wide-area scenarios include smart IoT (for example, elderly positioning, pet tracking, etc.). Typical scenarios in local positioning scenarios include intelligent manufacturing Manufacturing (for example, personnel location management, material location management, etc.), smart chemical industry (for example, personnel location management, electronic fences, one-click alarm, etc.), smart supermarkets (for example, product push and smart operations, customer flow, etc.) Analysis and shopping mall management, navigation shopping guide and parking car search, etc.). In view of the above background, 5G positioning service enhancement research (location services, LCS) has become a key research topic.
被定位设备移动时的定位业务连续性对于定位应用而言至关重要,也即,当被定位设备移动时,仍能保证定位流程顺利进行,保证仍能以较低的时延获取较高精度的设备位置信息来继续辅助定位应用做相关的决策与处理。Positioning business continuity when the positioned device is moving is crucial for positioning applications. That is, when the positioned device is moving, the positioning process can still be guaranteed to proceed smoothly and higher accuracy can still be obtained with lower latency. The device location information is used to continue to assist positioning applications in making relevant decisions and processing.
被定位设备(以UE为例)在5G系统内移动的场景又可以细分为三种场景:The scenario in which the positioned device (taking UE as an example) moves within the 5G system can be subdivided into three scenarios:
(1)UE处于连接管理连接态(Connection Management-connected,CM-connected)以及无线资源控制连接态(Radio Resource RRC-connected的移动场景。(1) The UE is in the connection management connection state (Connection Management-connected, CM-connected) and the radio resource control connection state (Radio Resource RRC-connected) mobile scenario.
(2)UE处于CM-connected以及RRC-inactive态的移动场景。(2)Mobility scenario where UE is in CM-connected and RRC-inactive states.
(3)UE处于连接管理空闲态(Connection Management-Idle)的移动场景。(3) Mobile scenario where UE is in Connection Management-Idle state.
3GPP版本(release)17中,对UE处于CM-connected以及RRC-inactive态定位的讨论中提出,UE在该状态下被定位时,由于移动会导致基站发生更换,也即,UE在该状态下由源基站移动到一个其它基站下,因此,为了保证定位业务连续性并降低定位时延,源基站需要将UE定位相关信息(positioning related information),或者,称为定位信息(positioning information)通过UE相关信令发送给目标基站。可选的,UE定位相关信息包括用于对终端设备进行定位的参数和/或配置。UE定位相关信息可包括(请求的)信道探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)传输特性信息(requested SRS transmission characteristics/SRS transmission characteristics)和LMF的标识(或路由标识(routing ID))。路由标识可以是UE在源基站进行定位业务时,为UE服务的LMF的标识。其中,LMF的标识是必选(mandatory,M)信元。In 3GPP version (release) 17, it was proposed in the discussion of positioning of UE in CM-connected and RRC-inactive states that when the UE is positioned in this state, the base station will be replaced due to movement. That is, the UE in this state will The source base station is moved to another base station. Therefore, in order to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and reduce the positioning delay, the source base station needs to pass the UE positioning related information (positioning related information) through the UE. Relevant signaling is sent to the target base station. Optionally, the UE positioning related information includes parameters and/or configurations used to position the terminal device. The UE positioning related information may include (requested) channel sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) transmission characteristic information (requested SRS transmission characteristics/SRS transmission characteristics) and the identifier of the LMF (or routing ID). The routing identifier may be the identifier of the LMF serving the UE when the UE performs positioning services at the source base station. Among them, the identifier of LMF is a mandatory (M) cell.
然而,由于UE位置发生变化,除了会导致基站变化外,还可能导致LMF发生变化,因此,UE定位相关信息中的LMF的标识可能过期,导致定位业务失败。However, due to changes in the UE location, in addition to causing changes in the base station, it may also cause changes in the LMF. Therefore, the identifier of the LMF in the UE positioning related information may expire, causing the positioning service to fail.
为了提高定位业务的可靠性,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法。该通信方法可基于图1A或图1B所示架构实现。示例性的,该方法可由第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元和第二接入网设备实施。In order to improve the reliability of positioning services, embodiments of the present application provide a communication method. The communication method can be implemented based on the architecture shown in Figure 1A or Figure 1B. Exemplarily, the method may be implemented by a first access management network element, a second location management network element and a second access network device.
应注意,本申请“终端设备”与“用户设备(User Equipment,UE)”可以互相替换。It should be noted that “terminal equipment” and “user equipment (User Equipment, UE)” in this application can be replaced with each other.
如图3所示,本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法可包括以下步骤:As shown in Figure 3, a communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
S301:第一接入管理网元接收第二接入网设备发送的第一消息,其中,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备。S301: The first access management network element receives the first message sent by the second access network device, where the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device.
本申请中,第一接入网设备可以是终端设备在移动至第二接入网设备之前为终端设备传输数据或信令或信号的接入网设备(last serving RAN/last serving gNB)。或者,第一接入网设备可以是终端设备的源接入网设备(source NG-RAN/source gNB)。或者,第一接入网设备存储了所述终端设备的上下文信息(UE context)。或者,第一接入网设备存储了所述终端设备的上下文信息,还与所述终端设备注册的AMF存在N2连接/NGAP连接。第二接入网设备可以是当前为终端设备传输数据或信令或信号的接入网设备。或者,第二接入网设备可以是目标接入网设备(target NG-RAN/target gNB)。“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备”也可替换为“终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备后”。In this application, the first access network device may be an access network device (last serving RAN/last serving gNB) that transmits data or signaling or signals for the terminal device before moving to the second access network device. Alternatively, the first access network device may be the source access network device (source NG-RAN/source gNB) of the terminal device. Alternatively, the first access network device stores context information (UE context) of the terminal device. Alternatively, the first access network device stores context information of the terminal device, and also has an N2 connection/NGAP connection with the AMF registered with the terminal device. The second access network device may be an access network device currently transmitting data or signaling or signals for the terminal device. Alternatively, the second access network device may be a target access network device (target NG-RAN/target gNB). "The terminal equipment moves from the first access network equipment to the second access network equipment" can also be replaced by "after the terminal equipment moves from the first access network equipment to the second access network equipment".
本申请中,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备可以理解为:终端设备在第二接入网设备发起RRC连接请求;或者,终端设备在第二接入网设备发起/发送RRC恢复请求(RRC resume);或者,终端设备向第二接入网设备发送RRC恢复请求(RRC resume);或者,终端设备向第二接入网设备发送测量报告(measurement report);或者,终端设备向第二接入网设备发送切换确认(handover confirm)。In this application, the movement of the terminal device from the first access network device to the second access network device can be understood as: the terminal device initiates an RRC connection request at the second access network device; or, the terminal device initiates an RRC connection request at the second access network device; Initiate/send an RRC recovery request (RRC resume); or, the terminal device sends an RRC recovery request (RRC resume) to the second access network device; or, the terminal device sends a measurement report (measurement report) to the second access network device; Or, the terminal device sends a handover confirmation (handover confirm) to the second access network device.
S301中,第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息。In S301, the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and the first positioning information.
其中,第一位置管理网元(如LMF)第一位置管理网元用于向第一接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息。可选的,定位信息也可称为终端设备相关的定位信息或定位协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)。或者,用于为处于第一接入网设备的终端设备提供定位服务(或位置服务)。或者,第一位置管理网元用于向第一接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息以及接收来自第一接入网设备发送的终端设备的定位信息。可选的,第一位置管理网元的标识可携带在终端设备的定位信息中,因此,第二接入网设 备可从终端设备的定位相关信息中获取第一位置管理网元的标识,并在第一消息中携带第一位置管理网元的标识。可以理解,由于终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备,即便第一位置管理网元将终端设备的定位信息发送至第一接入网设备,第一接入网设备也无法将定位信息发送至终端设备,因为第一位置管理网元的标识已过期,或者说终端设备已经移动至第二接入网设备,而第一位置管理网元的服务范围无法覆盖第二接入网设备,由此导致定位业务失败。Wherein, the first location management network element (such as LMF) is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device. Optionally, the positioning information may also be called terminal device-related positioning information or positioning protocol data unit (PDU). Or, it is used to provide positioning service (or location service) for the terminal device located on the first access network device. Alternatively, the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device and receive the positioning information of the terminal device sent from the first access network device. Optionally, the identity of the first location management network element can be carried in the positioning information of the terminal device. Therefore, the second access network device The device may obtain the identity of the first location management network element from the positioning related information of the terminal device, and carry the identity of the first location management network element in the first message. It can be understood that since the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device, even if the first location management network element sends the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, the first access network device It is also impossible to send positioning information to the terminal device because the identification of the first location management network element has expired, or the terminal device has moved to the second access network device, and the service range of the first location management network element cannot cover the second location. Access network equipment, resulting in positioning service failure.
第一定位信息可用于定位终端设备。例如,第一定位信息可包括用于定位终端设备的配置,如用于对终端设备进行定位的参数。可选的,第一定位信息可以是包括新无线定位协议A(NR positioning protocol A,NRPPa)PDU和/或LTE定位协议数据单元(LTE Positioning Protocol,LPP PDU)。可以理解,本申请中的终端设备的定位信息包括第一定位信息。The first positioning information can be used to position the terminal device. For example, the first positioning information may include configurations for positioning the terminal device, such as parameters for positioning the terminal device. Optionally, the first positioning information may include New Wireless Positioning Protocol A (NR Positioning Protocol A, NRPPa) PDU and/or LTE Positioning Protocol Data Unit (LTE Positioning Protocol, LPP PDU). It can be understood that the positioning information of the terminal device in this application includes first positioning information.
其中,S301之前,终端设备可从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备。Before S301, the terminal device may move from the first access network device to the second access network device.
S301中,第二接入网设备可以是当前为UE提供服务的接入网设备。其中,“可以是当前为UE提供服务的接入网设备”可以理解为:UE接入(access to)第二接入网设备并从第二接入网设备接收数据和/或信令;或者,UE附着(camped on)到第二接入网设备并从第二接入网设备接收数据和/或信令;或者,UE在第二接入网的信号覆盖范围内,并从第二接入网设备接收信令和/或信号或者向第二接入网设备发送信号和/或信令;或者,UE从第二接入网设备接收数据和/或信令和/或信号或者向第二接入网设备发送数据和/或信令和/或信号。In S301, the second access network device may be an access network device currently providing services to the UE. Among them, "can be an access network device currently providing services to the UE" can be understood as: the UE accesses (accesses to) the second access network device and receives data and/or signaling from the second access network device; or , the UE is attached (camped on) to the second access network device and receives data and/or signaling from the second access network device; or, the UE is within the signal coverage of the second access network and receives data from the second access network device. The network access device receives signaling and/or signals or sends signals and/or signaling to the second access network device; or the UE receives data and/or signaling and/or signals from the second access network device or sends signals to the second access network device. The second access network device sends data and/or signaling and/or signals.
可选地,本申请中,接入管理网元可以是AMF。位置管理网元可以是LMF。位置管理网元的标识可以是以下任意一种:路由标识(routing ID)、LMF ID、网络功能实例标识(Network Instance ID,NF instance ID)、IP地址、通用唯一标识符(Universally Unique Identifier,UUID)、统一资源标识符(Uniform Resource Identifier,URI)、统一资源定位符(Uniform Resource Locator,URL)、LMF的全局地址(global address of the LMF)、FQDN,等。接入网设备可以是以下任意一种:NG-RAN、演进型通用陆地无线接入网(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network,EUTRAN)设备;未来的接入网系统,例如6G接入网设备。Optionally, in this application, the access management network element may be an AMF. The location management network element may be an LMF. The identity of the location management network element can be any of the following: routing ID, LMF ID, Network Instance ID, NF instance ID, IP address, Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) ), Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), Uniform Resource Locator (URL), global address of the LMF (global address of the LMF), FQDN, etc. Access network equipment can be any of the following: NG-RAN, Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) equipment; future access network systems, such as 6G access network equipment.
可选地,本申请第一消息可以是上行UE相关定位传输(uplink UE associated NRPPa transport)或者可以是上行非UE相关定位传输uplink non UE associated NRPPa transport)。Optionally, the first message of this application may be uplink UE associated positioning transmission (uplink UE associated NRPPa transport) or may be uplink non-UE related positioning transmission uplink non UE associated NRPPa transport).
本申请NRPPa协议数据单元可以是以下任意一种:定位信息(Positioning Information)、定位信息请求(Positioning Information Request)、定位信息更新(Positioning Information Update)、定位信息回复(Positioning Information Response)、定位信息失败(Positioning Information Failure)、定位激活请求(Positioning Activation Request)、定位激活回复(Positioning Activation Response)、定位激活失败(Positioning Activation Failure)、定位去激活(Positioning Deactivation)。The NRPPa protocol data unit of this application can be any of the following: positioning information (Positioning Information), positioning information request (Positioning Information Request), positioning information update (Positioning Information Update), positioning information reply (Positioning Information Response), positioning information failure (Positioning Information Failure), Positioning Activation Request, Positioning Activation Response, Positioning Activation Failure, Positioning Deactivation.
第一消息还可以是路径切换请求(path switch request)消息或者可以是切换通知(handover notify)消息或者可以是切换需求(handover required)消息或者可以是UE上下文创建消息(Namf_Communication_CreateUEContext)。The first message may also be a path switch request (path switch request) message or a handover notification (handover notify) message or a handover required (handover required) message or a UE context creation message (Namf_Communication_CreateUEContext).
S302:第一接入管理网元确定第二位置管理网元,第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息。S302: The first access management network element determines the second location management network element, and the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device.
或者“第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息”可替换为,第二位置管理网元用于为处于第二接入网设备的终端设备提供位置服务;或者,第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息以及接收来自第二接入网设备发送的终端设备的定位信息;或者,第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备发送终端设备相关的定位信息以及接收来自第二接入网设备发送的终端设备相关的定位信息;或者,第二位置管理网元用于向第二接入网设备发送终端设备相关的定位信息。Or "the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device" can be replaced by, the second location management network element is used to provide location services for the terminal device located in the second access network device. ; Or, the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device and receive the positioning information of the terminal device sent from the second access network device; or, the second location management network element uses The second location management network element is configured to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device and receive positioning information related to the terminal device sent from the second access network device; or, the second location management network element is used to send positioning information related to the terminal device to the second access network device. Send positioning information related to the terminal device.
可以理解,由于UE的位置变更,为UE提供服务的位置管理网元可能发生变化。例如,在UE从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备后,UE当前所在的位置(例如,UE所在基站或所在小区所属的追踪区域标识(tracking area identity,TAI))不在第一位置管理网元的服务范围内,所述第一位置管理网元的服务区域可以理解为第一位置管理网元服务的TAI列表(TAI list)或者服务范围可以理解为第一位置管理网元服务的一个或多个追踪区域(Tracking Area,TA)。UE当前所在的位置可以被第二位置管理网元所服务(例如,UE移动至第二位置管理网元的服务范围内),核心网设备(如第一接入管理网元)可以确定新的位置管理网元(即第二位置管理网元)为UE提供位置/定位服务。应注意, 本申请“UE从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备”可以理解为:UE可在第二接入网设备发送数据/信号/信令以及接收第二接入网设备发送的数据/信号/信令;或者,UE可以接收第二接入网设备发送的数据/信号/信令。It can be understood that due to the location change of the UE, the location management network element that provides services to the UE may change. For example, after the UE moves from the first access network device to the second access network device, the current location of the UE (for example, the base station where the UE is located or the tracking area identity (TAI) of the cell to which the UE is located) is not in the first access network device. Within the service range of a location management network element, the service area of the first location management network element can be understood as the TAI list (TAI list) served by the first location management network element or the service range can be understood as the first location management network element One or more tracking areas (Tracking Area, TA) of the service. The current location of the UE can be served by the second location management network element (for example, the UE moves to the service range of the second location management network element), and the core network device (such as the first access management network element) can determine the new location management network element. The location management network element (ie, the second location management network element) provides location/positioning services for the UE. It should be noted that In this application, "UE moves from the first access network device to the second access network device" can be understood as: the UE can send data/signal/signaling on the second access network device and receive data sent by the second access network device. Data/signal/signaling; alternatively, the UE may receive data/signal/signaling sent by the second access network device.
应注意,本申请的“位置(location)”可以替换为“定位(positioning)”,本申请的“确定(determine)”可以替换为“发现(find)”,本申请的“服务范围”可以替换为“服务区域(service area)”。It should be noted that "location" in this application can be replaced by "positioning", "determine" in this application can be replaced by "find", and "service scope" in this application can be replaced is the "service area".
可选的,在S302之前,第一接入管理网元可根据终端设备的位置信息(User Location Information,ULI),确定第一位置管理网元无法支持对所述终端设备定位。或者,第一接入管理网元可根据终端设备的位置信息,确定需要改变终端设备的位置管理网元,即确定需要改变为该终端设备提供位置服务的位置管理网元。或者,第一接入管理网元可根据终端设备的位置信息,确定新的位置管理网元(如,第二位置管理网元)。Optionally, before S302, the first access management network element may determine that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device based on the location information (User Location Information, ULI) of the terminal device. Alternatively, the first access management network element may determine that the location management network element of the terminal device needs to be changed based on the location information of the terminal device, that is, it is determined that the location management network element that provides location services for the terminal device needs to be changed. Alternatively, the first access management network element may determine a new location management network element (eg, a second location management network element) based on the location information of the terminal device.
其中,终端设备的位置信息可包括终端设备所在的第二接入网设备的标识或终端设备所在的第二接入网设备的小区的标识(cell ID),或者可包括其他可用于标识终端设备的位置的信息,如经纬度坐标或TAI等。本申请中,接入网设备的标识例如包括如NG-RAN ID或无线接入网节点标识(RAN node ID/gNB ID)。The location information of the terminal device may include the identity of the second access network device where the terminal device is located or the cell ID (cell ID) of the second access network device where the terminal device is located, or may include other information that can be used to identify the terminal device. Location information, such as latitude and longitude coordinates or TAI, etc. In this application, the identification of the access network equipment includes, for example, NG-RAN ID or radio access network node identification (RAN node ID/gNB ID).
作为第一接入管理网元获得终端设备的位置信息的一种可能的方式,在S302之前,第一接入管理网元还可以接收到自于第二接入网设备的第四消息,第四消息可包括终端设备的位置信息。As a possible way for the first access management network element to obtain the location information of the terminal device, before S302, the first access management network element may also receive a fourth message from the second access network device. The four messages may include location information of the terminal device.
其中,第四消息可以用于路径切换(如第四消息为路径切换请求(path switch request)消息)、用于通知切换(如第四消息为切换通知(handover notify)消息)、用于请求切换(如第四消息为切换需求(handover required)消息),或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文(如第四消息为UE上下文创建消息(Namf_Communication_CreateUEContext))。Among them, the fourth message can be used for path switching (for example, the fourth message is a path switch request message), for notifying a switch (for example, the fourth message is a handover notify message), or for requesting a switch. (For example, the fourth message is a handover required message), or used to request the creation of a context of the terminal device (for example, the fourth message is a UE context creation message (Namf_Communication_CreateUEContext)).
作为第一接入管理网元获得终端设备的位置信息的另一种可能的方式,第一消息中还可包括终端设备的位置信息,例如,第一消息可以是第四消息。可选的,第一消息可以用于路径切换(如第一消息为路径切换请求消息)、用于通知切换(如第一消息为切换通知消息)、用于请求切换(如第一消息为切换需求消息),或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文(如第一消息为UE上下文创建消息)。As another possible way for the first access management network element to obtain the location information of the terminal device, the first message may also include the location information of the terminal device. For example, the first message may be a fourth message. Optionally, the first message may be used for path switching (for example, the first message is a path switching request message), for notifying switching (for example, the first message is a switching notification message), or for requesting switching (for example, the first message is a switching notification message). requirement message), or used to request the creation of a context of the terminal device (for example, the first message is a UE context creation message).
例如,第一接入管理网元可以根据终端设备的位置信息和第一位置管理网元的服务范围信息(如由第一位置管理网元提供服务的接入网设备和/或小区等),确定终端设备不在第一位置管理网元的服务范围内,因此确定改变位置管理网元或确定选择新的位置管理网元或确定选择第二位置管理网元。其中,第一位置管理网元的服务范围信息可以是存储在第一接入管理网元中的信息,例如,本地配置(local configuration/locally configured)在第一接入管理网元。第一位置管理网元的服务范围也可以是第一接入管理网元从其他网元(如NRF)获取的信息。For example, the first access management network element may be based on the location information of the terminal device and the service range information of the first location management network element (such as access network equipment and/or cells provided by the first location management network element), It is determined that the terminal device is not within the service range of the first location management network element, so it is determined to change the location management network element or to select a new location management network element or to select the second location management network element. The service scope information of the first location management network element may be information stored in the first access management network element, for example, local configuration (local configuration/locally configured) in the first access management network element. The service scope of the first location management network element may also be information obtained by the first access management network element from other network elements (such as NRF).
再例如,第一接入管理网元可以根据配置或策略信息,确定第二位置管理网元,例如,根据策略信息,当终端设备移动至第二接入网设备,就需改变为第二位置管理网元。可选的,在S302中,第一接入管理网元可根据终端设备的位置信息或本地配置或策略信息确定第二位置管理网元。或者可以说,S302中,可由第一接入管理网元根据终端设备的位置信息或本地配置或策略信息确定位置管理网元由第一位置管理网元改变为第二位置管理网元,或者,可由第一接入管理网元根据终端设备的位置信息或本地配置或策略信息选择第二位置管理网元,或者,可由第一接入管理网元根据终端设备的位置信息或本地配置或策略信息确定位置管理网元改变为第二位置管理网元。For another example, the first access management network element may determine the second location management network element based on the configuration or policy information. For example, according to the policy information, when the terminal device moves to the second access network device, it needs to change to the second location. Manage network elements. Optionally, in S302, the first access management network element may determine the second location management network element based on the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device. Or it can be said that in S302, the first access management network element may determine that the location management network element is changed from the first location management network element to the second location management network element according to the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device, or, The first access management network element may select the second location management network element based on the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device, or the first access management network element may select the second location management network element based on the location information or local configuration or policy information of the terminal device. It is determined that the location management network element is changed to the second location management network element.
此外,第一接入管理网元可建立/存储(store)/生成/记录(record)第一位置管理网元与第二位置管理网元之间的对应关系。可选的,该对应关系可表现为第一位置管理网元的标识与第二位置管理网元的标识的对应关系。或者可选的,该对应关系可表现为第一位置管理网元标识与第二位置管理网元标识的映射关系。或者可选的,该对应关系可表现为第一位置管理网元配置(LMF profile)与第二位置管理网元配置的对应关系。或者可选的,该对应关系可表现为终端设备的标识、第一位置管理网元的标识与第二位置管理网元的标识的对应关系。In addition, the first access management network element can establish/store/generate/record the corresponding relationship between the first location management network element and the second location management network element. Optionally, the corresponding relationship may be expressed as a corresponding relationship between the identifier of the first location management network element and the identifier of the second location management network element. Or optionally, the corresponding relationship may be expressed as a mapping relationship between the first location management network element identifier and the second location management network element identifier. Or optionally, the corresponding relationship can be expressed as a corresponding relationship between the first location management network element configuration (LMF profile) and the second location management network element configuration. Or optionally, the corresponding relationship may be expressed as a corresponding relationship between the identifier of the terminal device, the identifier of the first location management network element, and the identifier of the second location management network element.
示例性的,第一接入管理网元可通过位置管理网元改变流程,确定第二位置管理网元。在该流程中,第一接入管理网元可向第一位置管理网元发送消息,消息中可携带终端设备的标识、终端设备的位置信息(如第二接入网设备的标识和/或第二接入网设备的小区标识)或第二位置管理网元的标识中的至少一项。其中,第一接入管理网元可根据终端设备的位置信息确定支持为终端设备所在位置提供服务的位 置管理网元,作为第二位置管理网元,并在消息中携带第二位置管理网元的标识。此外,可选地,若第一接入管理网元没有在消息中携带第二位置管理网元的标识,第一位置管理网元可根据终端设备的位置信息选择第二位置管理网元。后续可由第一位置管理网元与第二位置管理网元之间交互终端设备的定位上下文(location context),并由第二位置管理网元向第一接入管理网元或第二接入网设备发送变更通知,表示终端设备的位置管理网元已改变。For example, the first access management network element may determine the second location management network element through the location management network element change process. In this process, the first access management network element may send a message to the first location management network element, and the message may carry the identifier of the terminal device and the location information of the terminal device (such as the identifier of the second access network device and/or At least one of the cell identifier of the second access network device) or the identifier of the second location management network element. Wherein, the first access management network element may determine a location that supports providing services for the location of the terminal device based on the location information of the terminal device. Set up the management network element as the second location management network element, and carry the identifier of the second location management network element in the message. In addition, optionally, if the first access management network element does not carry the identifier of the second location management network element in the message, the first location management network element can select the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device. Subsequently, the location context of the terminal device may be exchanged between the first location management network element and the second location management network element, and the second location management network element may communicate with the first access management network element or the second access network. The device sends a change notification, indicating that the location management network element of the terminal device has changed.
可选的,S302之前,第一接入管理网元还可确定终端设备存在定位相关信息或定位信息。否则,如果终端设备不存在定位相关信息,可忽略执行S302及后续流程。可选的,该定位相关信息可用于表征存在终端设备相关的定位业务。以下实施例中,为了区分该定位相关信息和其他定位信息,将该定位相关信息称为第一信息。可以理解为,该第一信息是核心网网元(例如,AMF、LMF、SMF、UDM、NRF,等)能够获取的一种与终端设备的定位业务相关的信息。Optionally, before S302, the first access management network element may also determine that the terminal device has positioning-related information or positioning information. Otherwise, if the terminal device does not have positioning-related information, execution of S302 and subsequent processes can be ignored. Optionally, the positioning-related information can be used to indicate the presence of positioning services related to the terminal device. In the following embodiments, in order to distinguish the positioning-related information from other positioning information, the positioning-related information is called first information. It can be understood that the first information is a kind of information related to the positioning service of the terminal device that can be obtained by core network elements (for example, AMF, LMF, SMF, UDM, NRF, etc.).
可以理解,本申请中,确定UE存在第一信息可以是指,根据终端设备的UE上下文(UE context)、UE的注册信息(registration information)、签约信息(subscription information)、移动管理上下文(mobility management context,MM context)、会话管理上下文(Session Management,SM context)或接入管理网元中存储的UE相关的信息确定存在第一信息。可选的,本申请中,第一信息可以包括以下任意一种或多种:定位业务标识(location service correlation ID,LCS correlation ID)、定位上下文、定位延迟参考标识(location deferred reference number,LDR reference number)、定位QoS(location QoS)信息、定位处理标识(例如,NRPPa处理标识(NRPPa transaction ID),LTE定位协议处理标识(LPP Transaction ID)。It can be understood that in this application, determining that the UE has the first information may refer to based on the UE context of the terminal device (UE context), the UE's registration information (registration information), subscription information (subscription information), mobility management context (mobility management Context (MM context), session management context (Session Management context, SM context) or UE-related information stored in the access management network element determines that the first information exists. Optionally, in this application, the first information may include any one or more of the following: location service correlation ID (LCS correlation ID), location context, location deferred reference number (LDR reference). number), location QoS (location QoS) information, location processing ID (for example, NRPPa transaction ID), LTE positioning protocol processing ID (LPP Transaction ID).
S303:第一接入管理网元向所述第二位置管理网元发送第二消息,和/或,所述第一接入管理网元向所述第二接入网设备发送第三消息。S303: The first access management network element sends a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the second access network device.
其中,所述第二消息包括所述第一定位信息、第二接入网设备的标识、小区标识和第一指示(indication)中的至少一个,其中,该小区属于第二接入网设备或第二接入网设备包括该小区。基于该第二消息,第二位置管理网元可获得第二接入网设备发送的第一定位信息,因此,后续可由第二位置管理网元提供终端设备的定位业务服务,保证定位业务的连续性,避免终端设备的定位业务失败。Wherein, the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, an identity of the second access network device, a cell identity and a first indication, wherein the cell belongs to the second access network device or The second access network equipment includes the cell. Based on the second message, the second location management network element can obtain the first positioning information sent by the second access network device. Therefore, the second location management network element can subsequently provide positioning service services for the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service. performance to avoid failure of the terminal device’s positioning service.
或者,第二位置管理网元可根据第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识确定该第二接入网设备,并从第二接入网设备获取与终端设备相关的定位信息,因此,后续可由第二位置管理网元提供终端设备的定位业务服务,保证定位业务的连续性,避免终端设备的定位业务失败。Alternatively, the second location management network element may determine the second access network device based on the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device, and obtain positioning information related to the terminal device from the second access network device. Therefore, , the second location management network element can subsequently provide positioning service services for the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and avoid failure of the positioning service for the terminal device.
或者,第二位置管理网元可根据第一指示,和第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识确定该第二接入网设备,并从第二接入网设备获取与终端设备相关的定位信息,因此,后续可由第二位置管理网元提供终端设备的定位业务服务,保证定位业务的连续性,避免终端设备的定位业务失败。Alternatively, the second location management network element may determine the second access network device according to the first indication and the identity and/or cell identity of the second access network device, and obtain information related to the terminal device from the second access network device. Therefore, the second location management network element can subsequently provide the positioning service of the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and avoid the failure of the positioning service of the terminal device.
或者,针对终端设备只有一个定位业务的场景,第二位置管理网元可根据第一指示获知终端设备的接入网设备发生改变,第二位置管理网元可通过第一接入管理网元从第二接入网设备获取与终端设备相关的定位信息,因此,后续可由第二位置管理网元提供终端设备的定位业务服务,保证定位业务的连续性,避免终端设备的定位业务失败。Alternatively, for the scenario where the terminal device has only one positioning service, the second location management network element can learn that the access network device of the terminal device has changed according to the first instruction, and the second location management network element can obtain the change from the first access management network element through the first access management network element. The second access network device obtains positioning information related to the terminal device. Therefore, the second location management network element can subsequently provide positioning service services for the terminal device to ensure the continuity of the positioning service and avoid failure of the positioning service for the terminal device.
本申请中,第一指示可用于指示接入网设备已改变(serving NG-RAN node changed)或者第一指示用于指示切换完成(handover complete notification/handover complete indication)或者用于指示切换(handover notification/handover indication)或者用于指示移动完成(mobility completion)或者用于指示为UE提供服务的接入网设备变更为第二接入网设备或者用于指示UE切换到第二接入网设备或者用于指示UE移动至第二接入网设备。In this application, the first indication may be used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed (serving NG-RAN node changed) or the first indication is used to indicate handover completion (handover complete notification/handover complete indication) or to indicate handover (handover notification) /handover indication) or used to indicate mobility completion (mobility completion) or used to indicate that the access network device providing services for the UE is changed to the second access network device or used to indicate the UE to switch to the second access network device or use Instructing the UE to move to the second access network device.
可选的,所述第二消息还包括第二指示。第二指示可用于指示位置管理网元已改变(has been changed),例如,第二指示可用于指示UE的位置管理网元已变更为第二位置管理网元。Optionally, the second message also includes a second indication. The second indication may be used to indicate that the location management network element has been changed. For example, the second indication may be used to indicate that the location management network element of the UE has been changed to the second location management network element.
其中,第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识可用于确定或选择第三接入网设备。所述第三接入网设备可以是用于对终端设备进行定位的接入网设备,或者,所述第三接入网设备可以是第二接入网设备相邻的接入网设备。其中,下文中将对于第三接入网设备的确定方式以及第三接入网设备的描述进行说明,这里暂不展开。The identification and/or cell identification of the second access network device may be used to determine or select the third access network device. The third access network device may be an access network device used to locate a terminal device, or the third access network device may be an access network device adjacent to the second access network device. Among them, the determination method of the third access network device and the description of the third access network device will be described below, which will not be described here.
可选的,本申请中的第一指示和/或第二指示可以是原因(cause)或指示或通知,等,其中原因或指示或通知可以采用枚举类型(enumerated/enum)或比特类型(bit)或布尔类型(boolean)或字符类型(string)的字段。例如,可以通过是否携带第二指示的方式;再例如,当第二指示对应的字段取值 为特定值时,表示第二指示相应的功能。同理,第一指示也可以通过是否携带第一指示的方式,或者,当第一指示对应的字段取值为特定值时,表示第一指示相应的功能。Optionally, the first indication and/or the second indication in this application may be a cause, an indication, or a notification, etc., where the cause, indication, or notification may be of enumerated type (enumerated/enum) or bit type ( bit) or boolean or character type (string) field. For example, it can be carried out by whether to carry the second indication; for another example, when the field corresponding to the second indication takes the value When it is a specific value, it indicates the corresponding function of the second instruction. In the same way, the first indication can also be determined by whether it carries the first indication, or when the value of the field corresponding to the first indication is a specific value, it indicates the function corresponding to the first indication.
可选的,本申请中的第二消息可以采用新定义的消息类型,也可以采用已有的消息类型。例如,第二消息可以是N2信息通知消息(Namf_Communication_N2InfoNotify/Namf_Communication_NonUeN2InfoNotify)。或者所述第二消息可以是位置上下文传输消息(Nlmf_LocationContextTransfer)。或者,第二消息可以是订阅通知消息(Namf_EventExposure_Notify)。或者,第二消息可以是事件通知(Namf_Location_EventNotify)。或者,第二消息可以是N1N2消息。或者,第二消息可以是N1消息通知(Namf_Communication_N1MessageNotify)。Optionally, the second message in this application may adopt a newly defined message type or an existing message type. For example, the second message may be an N2 information notification message (Namf_Communication_N2InfoNotify/Namf_Communication_NonUeN2InfoNotify). Or the second message may be a location context transfer message (Nlmf_LocationContextTransfer). Alternatively, the second message may be a subscription notification message (Namf_EventExposure_Notify). Alternatively, the second message may be an event notification (Namf_Location_EventNotify). Alternatively, the second message may be an N1N2 message. Alternatively, the second message may be N1 message notification (Namf_Communication_N1MessageNotify).
所述第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,所述第三消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。其中,第二位置管理网元的标识如上述位置管理网元的标识所述,此处不再赘述。The third message is used to notify that the location management network element has changed. The third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: One: the identification of the first location management network element and a second indication, where the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed. The identifier of the second location management network element is as described above for the identifier of the location management network element, and will not be described again here.
因此基于该第三消息,第二接入网设备可获知变更后的位置管理网元的信息,例如,第三消息可包括第二位置管理网元的标识,因此第二接入网设备可将为终端设备提供定位服务的第一位置管理网元的标识替换/更新为第二位置管理网元的标识。因此,第二接入网设备后续向第一接入管理网元发送第一消息,在第一消息中携带终端设备的定位信息,还可携带第二位置管理网元的标识,因此第一接入管理网元可根据第二位置管理网元的标识向第二位置管理网元发送终端设备的定位信息,保证定位信息到达第二位置管理网元,以此来保证定位业务连续性,避免终端设备的定位业务失败。Therefore, based on the third message, the second access network device can learn the changed information of the location management network element. For example, the third message can include the identification of the second location management network element, so the second access network device can The identity of the first location management network element that provides positioning services for the terminal device is replaced/updated with the identity of the second location management network element. Therefore, the second access network device subsequently sends a first message to the first access management network element. The first message carries the positioning information of the terminal device and may also carry the identifier of the second location management network element. Therefore, the first access network device The incoming management network element can send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second position management network element according to the identification of the second position management network element to ensure that the positioning information reaches the second position management network element, thereby ensuring the continuity of the positioning service and avoiding terminal The device's positioning service failed.
可选的,第三消息可以是N2消息,第三消息还可以是路径切换请求回复(path switch request ACK)消息,第三消息还可以是接入管理网元(例如,AMF)向接入网设备(例如,RAN)发送的消息。Optionally, the third message may be an N2 message. The third message may also be a path switch request ACK message. The third message may also be a request from the access management network element (for example, AMF) to the access network. Message sent by a device (e.g., RAN).
下面对本申请实施例提供的通信方法中,在S303中第一接入管理网元发送第二消息和第三消息分别相应的流程进行描述。The following describes the corresponding processes in which the first access management network element sends the second message and the third message in S303 in the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
作为一种可能的实现方式,如果第一接入管理网元向第二位置管理网元发送第二消息,则第二位置管理网元可通过接收第二消息,获得第二消息所包括的第一定位信息,或者,根据第二消息所包括的第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识,从第二接入网设备获取与终端设备相关的定位信息。相应的,第二位置管理网元可向第一接入管理网元发送第五消息。其中,所述第五消息包括第二位置管理网元的标识和/或第三指示,其中,第三指示可用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。因此,基于第五消息,第一接入管理网元可获知位置管理网元已变更为第二位置管理网元。可选的,第一接入管理网元可根据第五消息发送第三消息。As a possible implementation manner, if the first access management network element sends a second message to the second location management network element, the second location management network element can obtain the third information included in the second message by receiving the second message. Positioning information, or positioning information related to the terminal device is obtained from the second access network device according to the identity and/or cell identity of the second access network device included in the second message. Correspondingly, the second location management network element may send the fifth message to the first access management network element. Wherein, the fifth message includes an identification of the second location management network element and/or a third indication, wherein the third indication may be used to indicate that the location management network element has changed. Therefore, based on the fifth message, the first access management network element can learn that the location management network element has been changed to the second location management network element. Optionally, the first access management network element may send the third message according to the fifth message.
可选的,第五消息还可包括以下信息中的至少一个:第二定位信息、第二位置管理网元的标识、定位业务标识(LCS correlation ID或LDR reference number)、第三指示、终端设备标识(UE ID)和终端上下文标识(UE context ID)。本申请中,终端设备标识例如可包括用户永久标识(subscription permanent identifier,SUPI)、一般公共订阅标识符(generic public subscription identifier,GPSI)、国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identity,IMSI)、临时移动用户标识(temporary mobile subscriber identity,TMSI)或NG应用层协议(NG application protocol,NGAP)UE ID。同理,第三消息还可包括定位业务标识、终端设备的标识和终端上下文标识中的至少一项,其中定位业务标识、终端设备的标识和终端上下文标识中的至少一项可来自于第五消息。Optionally, the fifth message may also include at least one of the following information: second positioning information, identification of the second location management network element, positioning service identification (LCS correlation ID or LDR reference number), third indication, terminal device Identity (UE ID) and terminal context identification (UE context ID). In this application, the terminal device identifier may include, for example, user permanent identifier (subscription permanent identifier, SUPI), general public subscription identifier (GPSI), international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), temporary Mobile subscriber identity (temporary mobile subscriber identity, TMSI) or NG application layer protocol (NG application protocol, NGAP) UE ID. Similarly, the third message may also include at least one of the positioning service identifier, the terminal device identifier, and the terminal context identifier, wherein at least one of the positioning service identifier, the terminal device identifier, and the terminal context identifier may come from the fifth message. information.
其中,定位业务标识与终端设备标识的结合可用于唯一标识一个终端设备的一个定位业务。终端上下文标识或终端设备标识也可用于指示一个终端设备的一个定位业务,例如,当该终端设备只有一个定位业务,终端设备标识或终端上下文标识也可以指示一个终端设备的一个定位业务。Among them, the combination of the positioning service identifier and the terminal device identifier can be used to uniquely identify a positioning service of a terminal device. The terminal context identifier or terminal device identifier can also be used to indicate a positioning service of a terminal device. For example, when the terminal device has only one positioning service, the terminal device identifier or terminal context identifier can also indicate a positioning service of a terminal device.
第二定位信息可以是定位激活请求(positioning activation request)。例如,在第一定位信息中包括定位配置(可记为第一配置)时,第二定位信息可包括用于指示激活第一定位信息包括的第一配置。可以理解,本申请中的终端设备的定位信息包括第二定位信息。The second positioning information may be a positioning activation request. For example, when the first positioning information includes a positioning configuration (which may be recorded as a first configuration), the second positioning information may include indicating activation of the first configuration included in the first positioning information. It can be understood that the positioning information of the terminal device in this application includes second positioning information.
其中,如果第二消息包括第一定位信息,则第二位置管理网元可根据第一定位信息执行UE的定位业务或定位会话。例如,可选的,本申请中的第一定位信息可包括定位请求和/或第一配置,所述第一配置可以是SRS配置(SRS configuration)和/或定位参考信号(position reference signal,PRS)配置(PRS configuration)。因此第二位置管理网元可根据定位请求和/或定位配置进行UE的定位,向第一接入管理网元发送第二定位信息进而由第一接入管理网元将第二定位信息发送至第二接入网设备触发第二接入 网设备对UE进行定位,第二定位信息可以是定位激活请求(positioning activation request)。Wherein, if the second message includes the first positioning information, the second location management network element may perform the positioning service or positioning session of the UE according to the first positioning information. For example, optionally, the first positioning information in this application may include a positioning request and/or a first configuration, and the first configuration may be an SRS configuration (SRS configuration) and/or a position reference signal (position reference signal, PRS). ) configuration (PRS configuration). Therefore, the second location management network element can position the UE according to the positioning request and/or positioning configuration, send the second positioning information to the first access management network element, and then the first access management network element sends the second positioning information to The second access network device triggers the second access The network device positions the UE, and the second positioning information may be a positioning activation request (positioning activation request).
可选的,第一配置可由第二接入网设备根据第一参数确定。第一参数可以由第二接入网设备从第一接入网设备获得。例如,UE移动至第二接入网设备或UE在第二接入网设备发起RRC恢复(RRC resume),由第二接入网设备接收来自于第一接入网设备的第一参数。例如,第一参数包括请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性(requested SRS transmission characteristics)信息和/或请求的定位参考信号传输特性(requested PRS transmission characteristics)信息。其中,请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性可用于确定SRS配置。请求的定位参考信号传输特性可用于确定PRS配置。Optionally, the first configuration may be determined by the second access network device according to the first parameter. The first parameter may be obtained by the second access network device from the first access network device. For example, the UE moves to the second access network device or the UE initiates RRC resume (RRC resume) at the second access network device, and the second access network device receives the first parameter from the first access network device. For example, the first parameter includes requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristics (requested SRS transmission characteristics) information and/or requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristics (requested PRS transmission characteristics) information. Among them, the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristics can be used to determine the SRS configuration. The requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristics may be used to determine the PRS configuration.
如果第二消息包括第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识,则第二位置管理网元可获知为UE服务的接入网设备。第二位置管理网元还可根据第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识确定/选择第三接入网设备。可选的,第二位置管理网元还可将UE的定位业务相关信息(包括但不限于第一定位信息)发送至第三接入网设备,使得第三接入网设备根据第一定位信息对UE进行定位。If the second message includes the identity of the second access network device and/or the cell identity, the second location management network element can learn the access network device serving the UE. The second location management network element may also determine/select the third access network device according to the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device. Optionally, the second location management network element may also send the positioning service related information of the UE (including but not limited to the first positioning information) to the third access network device, so that the third access network device can perform positioning according to the first positioning information. Position the UE.
可选的,第三接入网设备可以是根据终端设备的位置信息确定/选择的。所述第三接入网设备可以是第二接入网设备的相邻接入网设备。本申请中,相邻的接入设备可以是与第二接入网设备直接存在Xn连接或IP连接或X2连接的接入网设备。所述第三接入网设备也可以不是第二接入网设备的相邻接入网设备,不是第二接入网设备的相邻接入网设备可以是与第二接入网设备不直接存在Xn连接或IP连接或X2连接的接入网设备。Optionally, the third access network device may be determined/selected based on the location information of the terminal device. The third access network device may be an adjacent access network device of the second access network device. In this application, the adjacent access device may be an access network device that directly has an Xn connection, an IP connection, or an X2 connection with the second access network device. The third access network device may not be an adjacent access network device to the second access network device, and an adjacent access network device that is not the second access network device may not be directly connected to the second access network device. Access network equipment with Xn connection, IP connection or X2 connection exists.
可以理解,第二消息可以是位置管理网元变更过程中的消息,如定位上下文传输请求(Nlmf_Location_LocationContextTransfer request),该第二消息可包括第一接入管理网元的标识,而不包括第一定位信息。相应的,第五消息中可包括第三指示,用于通知位置管理网元的变更过程已完成,则第一接入管理网元可在收到第三指示后,进一步向第二接入网设备发送第三消息,用于向第二接入网设备通知位置管理网元改变,例如,用于通知终端设备的位置管理网元已变更为第二位置管理网元。It can be understood that the second message may be a message in the process of changing the location management network element, such as a location context transfer request (Nlmf_Location_LocationContextTransfer request). The second message may include the identification of the first access management network element, but not the first location. information. Correspondingly, the fifth message may include a third instruction for notifying the location management network element that the change process has been completed. Then the first access management network element may further send a request to the second access network after receiving the third instruction. The device sends a third message, used to notify the second access network device of a change in the location management network element, for example, used to notify the terminal device that the location management network element has been changed to the second location management network element.
此外可选的,如果第二消息还包括小区标识,则第二位置管理网元还可根据小区标识选择第二接入网设备,或者说,第二接入网设备可以是第二位置管理网元根据第一接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识选择的。In addition, optionally, if the second message also includes a cell identifier, the second location management network element may also select the second access network device based on the cell identifier, or in other words, the second access network device may be the second location management network The element is selected based on the identity of the first access network device and/or the cell identity.
可选的,如果第二消息还包括第二指示,第二位置管理网元可以感知位置管理网元发生改变。示例性的,第二位置管理网元可根据第二指示生成前述第三指示,所述第三指示用于通知位置管理网元改变。可选的,通知可以替换为指示。Optionally, if the second message also includes a second indication, the second location management network element may sense that the location management network element has changed. For example, the second location management network element may generate the aforementioned third indication according to the second indication, and the third indication is used to notify the location management network element of changes. Optionally, notifications can be replaced with instructions.
作为一种可能的实现方式,如果第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送第三消息,第一接入网设备可根据第三消息获知为UE服务的位置管理网元已变更/已改变,因此可以将第一位置管理网元的标识替换/更新为第二位置管理网元的标识。后续第二接入网设备在向第一接入管理网元发送UE的定位信息(可包括定位请求和/或定位配置(如第一配置或与第一配置不同的第二配置)时,可携带第二位置管理网元的标识,而不再携带第一位置管理网元的标识,以避免位置管理网元过期导致的定位失败。As a possible implementation manner, if the first access network device sends a third message to the second access network device, the first access network device can learn that the location management network element serving the UE has changed based on the third message/ has been changed, so the identity of the first location management network element can be replaced/updated with the identity of the second location management network element. Subsequently, when the second access network device sends the UE's positioning information (which may include a positioning request and/or positioning configuration (such as a first configuration or a second configuration different from the first configuration)) to the first access management network element, The identifier of the second location management network element is carried instead of the identifier of the first location management network element to avoid positioning failure caused by expiration of the location management network element.
基于以上图3所示流程,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备后或者终端设备在第二接入网设备发起RRC恢复流程时,第一接入管理网元可接收携带有第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息的第一消息,并确定第二位置管理网元,其中,第二位置管理网元可用于为处于第二接入网设备的终端设备提供位置服务或者第二位置管理网元可用于向第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息。进一步的,第二接入网设备可将第一定位信息、第二接入网设备的标识、第一指示或小区标识中的至少一个发送至第二位置管理网元,由第二位置管理网元处理UE的定位业务,避免由于终端设备发生移动后,定位业务由于位置管理网元发生变化导致失败,因此可以提高定位业务连续性与可靠性。此外,第一接入管理网元可以将第三消息发送至第二接入网设备,使得第二接入网设备获知位置管理网元已变更,使得第二接入网设备替换/更新为UE服务的位置管理网元的信息,例如,可将第一位置管理网元的标识替换/更新为第二位置管理网元的标识,避免终端设备发生移动后,由于位置管理网元发生变化导致定位业务失败,来提高定位业务的连续性与可靠性。Based on the process shown in Figure 3 above, after the terminal equipment moves from the first access network equipment to the second access network equipment or when the terminal equipment initiates the RRC recovery process on the second access network equipment, the first access management network element can Receive the first message carrying the identity of the first location management network element and the first positioning information, and determine the second location management network element, wherein the second location management network element can be used to provide terminals located in the second access network device. The device provides location services or the second location management network element may be used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device. Further, the second access network device may send at least one of the first positioning information, the identification of the second access network device, the first indication or the cell identification to the second location management network element, and the second location management network This element processes the positioning service of the UE to avoid failure of the positioning service due to changes in the location management network element after the terminal device moves. Therefore, the continuity and reliability of the positioning service can be improved. In addition, the first access management network element may send the third message to the second access network device, so that the second access network device learns that the location management network element has been changed, so that the second access network device is replaced/updated with the UE Information about the location management network element of the service. For example, the identity of the first location management network element can be replaced/updated with the identity of the second location management network element to avoid positioning caused by changes in the location management network element after the terminal device moves. business failure to improve the continuity and reliability of positioning business.
可选的,在图3所示流程中,由于UE的移动,还可能导致UE的接入管理网元(例如,AMF)发生变化。其中,图3中的第一接入管理网元可理解为该场景中的变化后或更改后的或更换后的接入管理网元(例如,可以称为目标接入管理网元或者可称为新选择的接入管理网元(new AMF)),也就是说,在执行图3所示流程之前,还可执行接入管理网元的变更流程。后续为方便说明,将变更前的接入管理 网元称为第二接入管理网元。Optionally, in the process shown in Figure 3, due to the movement of the UE, the access management network element (for example, AMF) of the UE may also change. Among them, the first access management network element in Figure 3 can be understood as a changed or modified or replaced access management network element in this scenario (for example, it can be called a target access management network element or it can be called a target access management network element. For the newly selected access management network element (new AMF)), that is to say, before executing the process shown in Figure 3, the access management network element change process can also be executed. For the convenience of subsequent explanation, the access management before the change will be The network element is called the second access management network element.
示例性的,在接入管理网元的变更流程中,第一接入管理网元可向第二接入管理网元发送第六消息,该第六消息可用于提取UE上下文。第一接入管理网元可根据从第二接入管理网元提取的UE上下文确定UE存在第一信息,所述第六消息可以是UE上下文传输(Namf_Communication_UEContextTransfer),所述第一信息的解释如上所述,此处不再赘述。例如,第一信息包括定位业务标识、定位上下文、定位延迟参考标识、定位QoS信息、定位处理标识,和LTE定位协议处理标识中的至少一项。For example, in the change process of the access management network element, the first access management network element may send a sixth message to the second access management network element, and the sixth message may be used to extract the UE context. The first access management network element may determine that the UE has first information based on the UE context extracted from the second access management network element. The sixth message may be UE context transfer (Namf_Communication_UEContextTransfer). The explanation of the first information is as above. The above will not be repeated here. For example, the first information includes at least one of a positioning service identifier, a positioning context, a positioning delay reference identifier, positioning QoS information, a positioning processing identifier, and an LTE positioning protocol processing identifier.
可选的,第一接入管理网元还可向第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送第一接入管理网元的标识,用于表示接入管理网元已变更。例如,当终端设备只有一个定位业务,接入管理网元的标识携带在用于表征接入管理网元更换的消息中。可选的,第一接入管理网元还可向第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送第一接入管理网元的标识和所述定位业务标识,例如,当终端设备有多个定位业务,接入管理网元的标识与定位业务的标识携带在终端设备相关的消息中。本申请中所述接入管理网元的标识可以是以下任意一种或多种:AMF ID、网络功能实例标识、IP地址、UUID、URI、全球唯一AMF标识(globally unique AMF identifier,GUAMI)、URL、AMF的全局地址(global address of the AMF)或FQDN,等。Optionally, the first access management network element may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element to indicate that the access management network element has been changed. For example, when the terminal device has only one positioning service, the identifier of the access management network element is carried in the message used to represent the replacement of the access management network element. Optionally, the first access management network element may also send the identifier of the first access management network element and the positioning service identifier to the first location management network element or the second location management network element. For example, when the terminal device has For multiple positioning services, the identity of the access management network element and the identity of the positioning service are carried in messages related to the terminal device. The identification of the access management network element described in this application can be any one or more of the following: AMF ID, network function instance identification, IP address, UUID, URI, globally unique AMF identifier (GUAMI), URL, global address of the AMF (global address of the AMF) or FQDN, etc.
此外,可选的,第一接入管理网元还可向第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送第七消息,第七消息可用于指示接入管理网元已改变。例如,第七消息中可携带用于指示接入管理网元已改变的指示。可选的,第七消息可包括事件报告(event report)消息。其中,所述事件报告可用于终端设备上报周期或触发的定位事件。或者,第七消息可包括N1信息通知消息(Namf_Communication_N1MessageNotify),所述N1信息通知消息用于通知UE相关的N1消息。In addition, optionally, the first access management network element may also send a seventh message to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, and the seventh message may be used to indicate that the access management network element has changed. For example, the seventh message may carry an indication indicating that the access management network element has been changed. Optionally, the seventh message may include an event report message. Wherein, the event report may be used for the terminal device to report periodic or triggered positioning events. Alternatively, the seventh message may include an N1 information notification message (Namf_Communication_N1MessageNotify), which is used to notify the UE of related N1 messages.
可选的,第七消息可以采用已有的消息种类,例如,第七消息包括N1信息通知消息或者事件报告消息。第七消息还可以采用新的消息种类,不限定。Optionally, the seventh message may adopt an existing message type. For example, the seventh message includes an N1 information notification message or an event report message. The seventh message can also adopt a new message type without limitation.
此外,可选的,第一接入管理网元还可向第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送第一接入管理网元的标识,从而可由第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元及时更新终端的定位上下文,保证定位上下文中的接入管理网元标识为最新的接入管理网元标识,从而使得终端设备的定位业务得以延续,避免因接入管理网元标识过期,导致位置管理网元向接入管理网元发送消息时,发送至错误的接入管理网元,导致的定位业务失败。此外,第一接入管理网元还可向第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送终端设备的标识和/或定位业务标识,以指示第一接入管理网元对应的终端设备和/或业务,因此还可根据终端设备的标识和/或定位业务标识更新终端设备的定位上下文或更新定位上下文。In addition, optionally, the first access management network element may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, so that the first location management network element or the second location management network element can The second location management network element updates the terminal's positioning context in a timely manner to ensure that the access management network element identifier in the positioning context is the latest access management network element identifier, so that the positioning service of the terminal device can be continued and avoid errors caused by the access management network element. The identity expires, causing the location management network element to send messages to the access management network element, but the message is sent to the wrong access management network element, causing the positioning service to fail. In addition, the first access management network element may also send the identification of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identification to the first location management network element or the second location management network element to indicate the terminal device corresponding to the first access management network element. and/or services, therefore the positioning context of the terminal device or the positioning context can also be updated according to the identity of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identity.
下面以接入网设备是基站、终端设备是UE、接入管理网元是AMF,且位置管理网元是LMF为例,对本申请实施例提供的通信方法的可能的流程进行介绍。Taking the access network device as the base station, the terminal device as the UE, the access management network element as the AMF, and the location management network element as the LMF as an example, the possible flow of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
在如图4所示流程中,由AMF作为第一接入网设备,AMF可以在接收到来自于目标基站(对应于前述第二接入网设备)的N2路径切换请求后,根据N2路径切换请求中包括的终端设备的位置信息确定是否需要更换LMF。在为UE提供定位服务的LMF从第一LMF(对应于前述第一位置管理网元)变更为第二LMF(对应于前述第二位置管理网元)后,AMF还可将来自于目标基站的NRPPa PDU转发至第二LMF,使得第二LMF处理NRPPa PDU。具体的,该实施例可包括以下步骤:In the process shown in Figure 4, the AMF serves as the first access network device. After receiving the N2 path switching request from the target base station (corresponding to the aforementioned second access network device), the AMF can switch according to the N2 path. The location information of the terminal device included in the request determines whether the LMF needs to be replaced. After the LMF that provides positioning services for the UE is changed from the first LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned first location management network element) to the second LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned second location management network element), the AMF can also change the location information from the target base station. The NRPPa PDU is forwarded to the second LMF, allowing the second LMF to process the NRPPa PDU. Specifically, this embodiment may include the following steps:
S401:进行周期性定位的RRC-inactive态的UE发生基站/服务基站(last serving gNB)的更换。S401: The base station/serving base station (last serving gNB) of the UE in the RRC-inactive state that performs periodic positioning occurs.
可以理解,S401中,终端设备从源基站移动至目标基站。其中,源基站可对应于以上方法实施例中的第一接入网设备,目标基站可对应于第二接入网设备。It can be understood that in S401, the terminal device moves from the source base station to the target base station. The source base station may correspond to the first access network device in the above method embodiment, and the target base station may correspond to the second access network device.
S402:UE向更换后的目标基站发送RRC恢复(RRC resume)消息。S402: The UE sends an RRC resume (RRC resume) message to the changed target base station.
其中,RRC恢复消息中包括UE的标识。UE的标识可以是非激活态网络临时标识(inactive rradio network temporary identifier,I-RNTI)。The RRC recovery message includes the identity of the UE. The identity of the UE may be an inactive network temporary identifier (inactive rradio network temporary identifier, I-RNTI).
S403:目标基站向源基站请求提取UE相关的信息。S403: The target base station requests the source base station to extract UE-related information.
可选的,S403中,目标基站可向源基站发送获取UE上下文请求(retrieve UE context request)。UE相关的信息可包括UE上下文。Optionally, in S403, the target base station may send a retrieve UE context request (retrieve UE context request) to the source base station. UE related information may include UE context.
其中,源基站可根据I-RNTI确定。例如,I-RNTI中携带的源基站标识。The source base station can be determined based on the I-RNTI. For example, the source base station identifier carried in the I-RNTI.
S404:源基站向目标基站发送UE相关的信息。S404: The source base station sends UE-related information to the target base station.
其中,UE相关的信息可包括UE定位相关信息。UE定位相关信息可包括SRS参数信息和/或PRS参数信息,以及第一LMF的标识。例如,SRS参数信息可以是信道探测参考信号传输特性信息。PRS 参数信息可以是定位参考信号传输特性信息。第一LMF的标识也即UE在源基站进行定位业务时,为UE定位服务的第一LMF的标识。The UE-related information may include UE positioning-related information. The UE positioning related information may include SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information, and the identity of the first LMF. For example, the SRS parameter information may be channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information. PRS The parameter information may be positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information. The identity of the first LMF is also the identity of the first LMF that provides positioning services for the UE when the UE performs positioning services at the source base station.
可选的,S404中,源基站可向目标基站发送获取UE上下文响应(retrieve UE context response),其中包括UE相关的信息。Optionally, in S404, the source base station may send a retrieve UE context response (retrieve UE context response) to the target base station, which includes UE-related information.
S405:目标基站根据SRS参数信息和/或PRS参数信息确定SRS配置和/或PRS配置,以降低定位时延,保持定位业务连续性。S405: The target base station determines the SRS configuration and/or the PRS configuration according to the SRS parameter information and/or the PRS parameter information to reduce the positioning delay and maintain positioning service continuity.
之后UE可以继续发送上行SRS信号和/或基站可以继续发送下行PRS信号,继续进行定位测量。Afterwards, the UE can continue to send uplink SRS signals and/or the base station can continue to send downlink PRS signals to continue positioning measurements.
S406:目标基站向AMF发送N2路径切换请求(N2path switch request),其中包括UE的位置信息(user location information)。S406: The target base station sends an N2 path switch request (N2path switch request) to the AMF, which includes the UE's location information (user location information).
UE的位置信息可包含目标基站的标识(RAN ID)还可以包含UE所在小区标识(cell ID)。The location information of the UE may include the identification of the target base station (RAN ID) and may also include the identification of the cell where the UE is located (cell ID).
相应的,AMF接收N2路径切换请求。Correspondingly, AMF receives the N2 path switching request.
可以理解,以上方法实施例中所述的第四消息可包括S406中的N2路径切换请求。It can be understood that the fourth message described in the above method embodiment may include the N2 path switching request in S406.
S407:AMF发现UE存在定位相关信息(has positioning related information),并且AMF确定需要改变LMF或者确定需要选择新的LMF。其中,这里的定位相关信息可以是指第一信息。第一信息可参见前述说明。S407: The AMF finds that the UE has positioning related information, and the AMF determines that the LMF needs to be changed or a new LMF needs to be selected. The positioning-related information here may refer to the first information. The first information can be found in the foregoing description.
可选的,AMF可根据UE的位置信息确定需要改变LMF或者选择新的LMF或者确定新的LMF或者确定目标LMF,或者说,确定第一LMF无法支持对UE定位。Optionally, the AMF may determine that the LMF needs to be changed, select a new LMF, determine a new LMF, or determine a target LMF based on the UE's location information, or determine that the first LMF cannot support positioning the UE.
可选的,AMF可根据本地配置信息确定需要改变LMF或者选择新的LMF。本地配置信息可以是运营商配置的信息,例如,当UE移动到该基站下时,需要重新选择LMF或者更换LMF。Optionally, the AMF may determine that the LMF needs to be changed or select a new LMF based on the local configuration information. The local configuration information may be information configured by the operator. For example, when the UE moves to the base station, the LMF needs to be reselected or the LMF needs to be replaced.
可选的,AMF可根据策略信息确定需要改变LMF或者选择新的LMF。例如,根据策略配置,当UE移动到该基站下时,需要重新选择LMF或者更换LMF。Optionally, the AMF may determine that the LMF needs to be changed or select a new LMF based on the policy information. For example, according to the policy configuration, when the UE moves to the base station, the LMF needs to be reselected or the LMF needs to be replaced.
S408:AMF保留第一LMF的标识。S408: The AMF retains the identity of the first LMF.
其中,保留(keep)也可替换为存储或不删除。Among them, keep (keep) can also be replaced by storage or not deleted.
应注意,保留第一LMF的标识可以理解为:UE在源基站进行定位业务时,AMF可以获得UE的定位信息,其中可包含第一LMF的标识,则此时AMF保留第一LMF的标识。It should be noted that retaining the identity of the first LMF can be understood as: when the UE performs positioning services at the source base station, the AMF can obtain the positioning information of the UE, which may include the identity of the first LMF. In this case, the AMF retains the identity of the first LMF.
本申请中,LMF的标识包括LMF ID、网络功能实例标识、路由标识、IP地址、UUID、URI、URL、全局地址,和FQDN中的至少一项。In this application, the identifier of the LMF includes at least one of the LMF ID, network function instance identifier, routing identifier, IP address, UUID, URI, URL, global address, and FQDN.
S409:AMF触发LMF改变流程,为UE选择新的LMF执行定位服务,例如,选择第二LMF。S409: The AMF triggers the LMF change process and selects a new LMF for the UE to perform positioning services, for example, selects the second LMF.
其中,在LMF改变流程中,第一LMF向第二LMF发送UE的定位上下文。In the LMF change process, the first LMF sends the positioning context of the UE to the second LMF.
S410:AMF存储第一LMF与第二LMF的对应关系,例如,第一LMF的标识与第二LMF的标识的对应关系或映射关系。S410: The AMF stores the corresponding relationship between the first LMF and the second LMF, for example, the corresponding relationship or mapping relationship between the identifier of the first LMF and the identifier of the second LMF.
其中,存储也可替换为生成或确定或记录。Among them, storage can also be replaced by generating or determining or recording.
S411:AMF向目标基站发送N2路径切换回复(N2 path switch request ACK)。S411: AMF sends N2 path switch reply (N2 path switch request ACK) to the target base station.
S412:目标基站向AMF发送上行UE相关NRPPa传输。S412: The target base station sends the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission to the AMF.
其中,上行UE相关NRPPa传输中可包括NRPPa PDU。NRPPa PDU可携带更新后的SRS配置和/或PRS配置(也即,在S405中更新的SRS配置)。Among them, the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission may include NRPPa PDU. The NRPPa PDU may carry the updated SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration (that is, the SRS configuration updated in S405).
上行UE相关NRPPa传输还可携带路由标识,即第一LMF的标识。The uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission may also carry a routing identifier, that is, the identifier of the first LMF.
可以理解,S301中的第一消息可包括S412中的上行UE相关NRPPa传输。It can be understood that the first message in S301 may include the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission in S412.
S413:AMF根据第一LMF的标识与第二LMF的标识的对应关系确定第二LMF的标识。S413: The AMF determines the identity of the second LMF based on the correspondence between the identity of the first LMF and the identity of the second LMF.
例如,AMF根据第一LMF与第二LMF的对应关系,确定第二LMF;或者将第一LMF的标识映射为第二LMF的标识。For example, the AMF determines the second LMF based on the corresponding relationship between the first LMF and the second LMF; or maps the identity of the first LMF to the identity of the second LMF.
可以理解,S302可包括S413所示步骤。It can be understood that S302 may include the steps shown in S413.
S414:AMF向第二LMF发送携带上述NRPPa PDU的N2消息通知消息,该消息中还包括以下一种或多种信息:用于指示LMF已经改变的信息(即前述第二指示的示例)、UE所在的小区标识、目标基站的标识、切换通知或指示(即前述第一指示的示例)、切换完成的通知或指示(即前述第一指示的示例)。S414: The AMF sends the N2 message notification message carrying the above NRPPa PDU to the second LMF. The message also includes one or more of the following information: information used to indicate that the LMF has changed (i.e., the aforementioned example of the second indication), UE The identity of the cell where the user is located, the identity of the target base station, a handover notification or indication (ie, an example of the foregoing first indication), and a handover completion notification or indication (ie, an example of the foregoing first indication).
其中,如果AMF在确定UE存在定位相关信息时,LMF改变流程还未执行完,则AMF可等待LMF改变完成后,再发送携带以上NRPPa PDU的消息。其中,这里的定位相关信息是指第一信息。第一信 息可参见前述说明。Among them, if the LMF change process has not been completed when the AMF determines that the UE has positioning-related information, the AMF can wait for the LMF change to be completed before sending the message carrying the above NRPPa PDU. The positioning-related information here refers to the first information. first letter Please refer to the above description for information.
可选的,用于指示LMF已经改变的信息可以是原因或指示或通知等。原因或指示或通知可以是枚举类型或比特类型或布尔类型或字符类型等数据,其用于指示第二LMF通知LMF已经改变。Optionally, the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed may be a reason, an indication, a notification, etc. The reason or indication or notification may be data of enumeration type or bit type or Boolean type or character type, which is used to indicate that the second LMF notifies the LMF that the LMF has changed.
可以理解,S303中的第二消息可包括该N2消息通知消息。It can be understood that the second message in S303 may include the N2 message notification message.
S415:可选的,第二LMF可根据用于指示第二LMF通知LMF已经改变或LMF改变的信息,确定向目标基站发送用于指示或通知LMF已经改变的信息。S415: Optionally, the second LMF may determine to send the information indicating or notifying the LMF that the LMF has changed to the target base station based on the information that instructs the second LMF to notify the LMF that the LMF has changed or that the LMF has changed.
S416:第二LMF向AMF发送N1N2消息传输(Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer),其可携带NRPPa PDU。S416: The second LMF sends an N1N2 message transfer (Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer) to the AMF, which can carry NRPPa PDU.
可选的,该N1N2消息传输中还包括用于指示LMF已经改变或LMF改变的信息,其中LMF已经改变或LMF改变的信息,例如,可以是第二LMF的标识;或者可以是第二LMF的标识以及LMF已经更换的指示/通知或LMF更换的指示/通知。Optionally, the N1N2 message transmission also includes information indicating that the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed. The information that the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed, for example, may be the identification of the second LMF; or may be the identification of the second LMF. identification and indication/notification that the LMF has been replaced or that the LMF has been replaced.
可以理解,S416中的NRPPa PDU与S412中的NRPPa PDU可以不同。例如,S412中的NRPPa PDU可以是定位信息更新(positioning information update),S416中的NRPPa PDU可以是定位激活请求(positioning activation request)。It can be understood that the NRPPa PDU in S416 and the NRPPa PDU in S412 can be different. For example, the NRPPa PDU in S412 can be positioning information update (positioning information update), and the NRPPa PDU in S416 can be positioning activation request (positioning activation request).
以上方法实施例中的第五消息可包括该N1N2消息传输。The fifth message in the above method embodiment may include the N1N2 message transmission.
S417:AMF向目标基站发送下行UE相关NRPPa传输(downlink UE associted NRPPa transport),其中携带NRPPa PDU、用于指示LMF已经改变的信息或用于指示LMF改变的信息,其中LMF已经改变或LMF改变的信息,例如,可以是第二LMF的标识;或者可以是第二LMF的标识以及LMF已经更换的指示或通知(即前述第三指示的示例)。S417: AMF sends downlink UE associated NRPPa transport to the target base station, which carries NRPPa PDU, information indicating that the LMF has changed, or information indicating that the LMF has changed, where the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed. The information, for example, may be the identification of the second LMF; or may be the identification of the second LMF and an indication or notification that the LMF has been replaced (ie, an example of the aforementioned third indication).
该NRPPa PDU为步骤S416中来自于第二LMF的NRPPa PDU。The NRPPa PDU is the NRPPa PDU from the second LMF in step S416.
目标基站接收所述LMF已经改变或LMF改变的信息,可以将第一LMF的标识更新/替换为第二LMF的标识。可选地,目标基站还可以向源基站/锚点基站/上一个为UE服务的基站(last serving gNB/RAN)发送第二LMF的标识。The target base station receives the information that the LMF has changed or the LMF has changed, and may update/replace the identity of the first LMF with the identity of the second LMF. Optionally, the target base station may also send the identifier of the second LMF to the source base station/anchor base station/last base station serving the UE (last serving gNB/RAN).
可以理解,S303中的第三消息可包括该下行UE相关NRPPa传输。It can be understood that the third message in S303 may include the downlink UE-related NRPPa transmission.
基于图4所示流程,可由AMF将来自于目标基站的NRPPa PDU转发至第二LMF,使得第二LMF处理NRPPa PDU,以避免终端设备的定位业务的失败,可提高定位业务连续性。Based on the process shown in Figure 4, the AMF can forward the NRPPa PDU from the target base station to the second LMF, so that the second LMF processes the NRPPa PDU to avoid the failure of the positioning service of the terminal device and improve the continuity of the positioning service.
可以理解,S409所示步骤可以在AMF接收到S406中的N2路径切换请求之后执行。此外,S410可以在S409执行完LMF的更换后执行。S411与S409或S410之间没有严格的时需限制,S411可以在S409或S410之前执行,也就是说,AMF在发送S411所示的N2路径切换回复时,S410可能尚未完成。It can be understood that the step shown in S409 can be executed after the AMF receives the N2 path switching request in S406. In addition, S410 can be executed after S409 completes the replacement of the LMF. There is no strict time limit between S411 and S409 or S410. S411 can be executed before S409 or S410. That is to say, when AMF sends the N2 path switching reply shown in S411, S410 may not be completed yet.
此外,S412可以在收到S411中的N2路径切换回复后执行,也可以在S405执行完且执行S406之前执行,也可以在执行S406后且收到S411中的N2路径切换回复之前执行。In addition, S412 may be executed after receiving the N2 path switching reply in S411, may be executed after S405 is executed and before S406 is executed, or may be executed after S406 is executed but before the N2 path switching reply in S411 is received.
如图5所示流程与图4所示流程的区别在于,AMF在接收到来自于目标基站的NRPPa PDU,并在确定为UE提供定位服务的LMF从第一LMF(对应于前述第一位置管理网元)变更为第二LMF(对应于前述第二位置管理网元)后,向目标基站发送第二LMF的标识。后续目标基站可发送第二LMF的标识和NRPPa PDU,使得第二LMF处理NRPPa PDU。具体的,该实施例可包括以下步骤:The difference between the process shown in Figure 5 and the process shown in Figure 4 is that the AMF receives the NRPPa PDU from the target base station and determines the LMF that provides positioning services for the UE from the first LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned first location management After the network element) is changed to the second LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned second location management network element), the identifier of the second LMF is sent to the target base station. Subsequently, the target base station can send the identifier of the second LMF and the NRPPa PDU, so that the second LMF processes the NRPPa PDU. Specifically, this embodiment may include the following steps:
S501-S513与S401-S413相同,不再赘述。S501-S513 are the same as S401-S413 and will not be described again.
S514:AMF向目标基站发送N2消息。N2消息中可包括第二LMF的标识,或包括第二LMF的标识以及以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一LMF的标识和用于指示LMF已改变或LMF改变的信息,所述LMF已改变或LMF改变的信息可以是例如,可以LMF改变/更新/更改的指示/通知。S514: The AMF sends the N2 message to the target base station. The N2 message may include the identity of the second LMF, or the identity of the second LMF and at least one of the following information: the identity of the first LMF and information indicating that the LMF has changed or that the LMF has changed. The change or LMF change information may be, for example, an indication/notification of the LMF change/update/change.
可选的,N2消息,例如,可以是UE相关的N2消息,例如,UE相关的N2消息可以是下行UE相关NRPPa传输。N2消息还可以是一条新消息,例如,专门用于通知LMF更改。Optionally, the N2 message may be, for example, a UE-related N2 message. For example, the UE-related N2 message may be a downlink UE-related NRPPa transmission. The N2 message can also be a new message, e.g. specifically used to notify LMF of changes.
可选的,用于指示LMF已改变的信息可以是原因或通知或指示等。原因或通知或指示可以是枚举类型或比特类型或字符类型或布尔类型等,其用于指示LMF已经改变或发生改变(change)。Optionally, the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed may be a reason, a notification, an instruction, etc. The cause or notification or indication may be an enumeration type or a bit type or a character type or a Boolean type, etc., which is used to indicate that the LMF has changed or changed.
可以理解,S303中的第三消息可包括S514中的N2消息。It can be understood that the third message in S303 may include the N2 message in S514.
S515:目标基站根据上述N2消息,将第一LMF的标识替换或更新为第二LMF的标识。S515: The target base station replaces or updates the identity of the first LMF with the identity of the second LMF according to the above N2 message.
例如,目标基站可更新终端设备的定位相关信息,将第一LMF的标识替换或更新为第二LMF的标识。For example, the target base station may update the positioning-related information of the terminal device and replace or update the identity of the first LMF with the identity of the second LMF.
S516:目标基站向AMF发送上行UE相关NRPPa传输。上行UE相关NRPPa传输中可包括NRPPa  PDU和第二LMF的标识。S516: The target base station sends the uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission to the AMF. The uplink UE-related NRPPa transmission may include NRPPa Identification of the PDU and second LMF.
S517:AMF根据第二LMF的标识向第二LMF发送N2消息通知消息,其中包括NRPPa PDU。因此可由第二LMF对UE相关的NRPPa PDU进行处理。S517: The AMF sends an N2 message notification message to the second LMF according to the identifier of the second LMF, including the NRPPa PDU. Therefore, the UE-related NRPPa PDU can be processed by the second LMF.
基于图5所示流程,可由AMF向目标基站发送第二LMF的标识,目标基站可将第一LMF的标识替换或更新为第二LMF的标识,因此目标基站后续可发送终端设备的NRPPa PDU到达第二LMF,使得第二LMF处理NRPPa PDU,以避免终端设备的定位业务的失败,可提高定位业务连续性。Based on the process shown in Figure 5, the AMF can send the identifier of the second LMF to the target base station. The target base station can replace or update the identifier of the first LMF with the identifier of the second LMF. Therefore, the target base station can subsequently send the NRPPa PDU of the terminal device to arrive. The second LMF enables the second LMF to process the NRPPa PDU to avoid the failure of the positioning service of the terminal device and improve the continuity of the positioning service.
在如图6所示流程与图5所示流程的区别在于,AMF在接收到来自于目标基站的N2路径切换请求后,暂时不向目标基站发送N2路径切换回复。在AMF确定为UE提供定位服务的LMF从第一LMF(对应于前述第一位置管理网元)变更为第二LMF(对应于前述第二位置管理网元)后,向目标基站发送包括第二LMF的标识的N2路径切换回复。后续目标基站可发送第二LMF的标识和NRPPa PDU,使得第二LMF处理NRPPa PDU。具体的,该实施例可包括以下步骤:The difference between the process shown in Figure 6 and the process shown in Figure 5 is that after receiving the N2 path switching request from the target base station, the AMF temporarily does not send an N2 path switching reply to the target base station. After the AMF determines that the LMF that provides positioning services for the UE has been changed from the first LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned first location management network element) to the second LMF (corresponding to the aforementioned second location management network element), it sends the second LMF to the target base station. LMF identifies the N2 path switch reply. Subsequently, the target base station can send the identifier of the second LMF and the NRPPa PDU, so that the second LMF processes the NRPPa PDU. Specifically, this embodiment may include the following steps:
S601至S607与图4所示流程中的S401至S407相同,不再赘述。S601 to S607 are the same as S401 to S407 in the process shown in Figure 4 and will not be described again.
S608:AMF触发LMF改变流程。S608: AMF triggers LMF change process.
S609:在完成LMF改变流程执行完成后,向目标基站发送N2路径切换回复。S609: After completing the execution of the LMF change process, send an N2 path switching reply to the target base station.
其中,N2路径切换回复包括第二LMF的标识,或包括第二LMF的标识以及以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一LMF的标识和用于指示LMF已改变的信息,所述用于指示LMF已改变的信息可以是LMF已经更换的指示或通知。Wherein, the N2 path switching reply includes the identification of the second LMF, or includes the identification of the second LMF and at least one of the following information: the identification of the first LMF and the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed, the information used to indicate that the LMF has changed The information that the LMF has been changed may be an indication or notification that the LMF has been replaced.
其中,第二LMF为改变后的LMF或第二LMF为AMF新选择的LMF。Among them, the second LMF is the changed LMF or the second LMF is the LMF newly selected by the AMF.
可以理解,S303中的第三消息可包括该N2路径切换回复。It can be understood that the third message in S303 may include the N2 path switching reply.
S610至S612与图5所示流程中的S515至S517相同,不再赘述。S610 to S612 are the same as S515 to S517 in the process shown in Figure 5 and will not be described again.
在如图7所示流程中,由目标基站确定终端设备存在定位相关信息,并在向AMF发送的N2路径切换请求中携带NRPPa PDU和第一LMF的标识。也就是说,该示例中,由第一消息携带第一定位信息和第一LMF的标识。In the process shown in Figure 7, the target base station determines that the terminal device has positioning-related information, and carries the NRPPa PDU and the identity of the first LMF in the N2 path switching request sent to the AMF. That is to say, in this example, the first message carries the first positioning information and the identity of the first LMF.
具体的,该实施例可包括以下步骤:Specifically, this embodiment may include the following steps:
S701至S705与图4所示流程中的S401至S405相同,不再赘述。S701 to S705 are the same as S401 to S405 in the process shown in Figure 4 and will not be described again.
S706:目标基站确定/发现UE存在定位相关信息。S706: The target base station determines/discovers that the UE has positioning-related information.
其中,所述定位相关信息可包括LMF的标识、SRS参数信息和PRS参数信息中的至少一个消息。The positioning-related information may include at least one of the LMF identification, SRS parameter information, and PRS parameter information.
目标基站可根据源基站发送的UE相关的信息判断UE是否存在定位相关信息。例如,来自于源基站的UE的相关信息可包括定位相关信息,则目标基站确定UE存在定位相关信息。The target base station can determine whether the UE has positioning-related information based on the UE-related information sent by the source base station. For example, the UE related information from the source base station may include positioning related information, and then the target base station determines that the UE has positioning related information.
S707:目标基站向AMF发送N2路径切换请求,其中携带NRPPa PDU和第一LMF的标识。S707: The target base station sends an N2 path switching request to the AMF, which carries the NRPPa PDU and the identity of the first LMF.
其中,NRPPa PDU可携带更新后的SRS配置和/或PRS配置(也即,在S705中确定的SRS配置和/或PRS配置)。Among them, the NRPPa PDU may carry the updated SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration (that is, the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration determined in S705).
之后可执行图4所示的S407至S417,或执行图5所示的S507至S517,或执行图6所示的S607至S612。Afterwards, S407 to S417 shown in FIG. 4 may be executed, or S507 to S517 shown in FIG. 5 may be executed, or S607 to S612 shown in FIG. 6 may be executed.
在如图8所示流程中,通过切换流程UE相关的信令,源基站将UE定位相关信息发送给目标基站,之后由目标基站确定终端设备存在定位相关信息,并在向AMF发送NRPPa PDU和第一LMF的标识。In the process shown in Figure 8, through the UE-related signaling of the handover process, the source base station sends the UE positioning-related information to the target base station. The target base station then determines that the terminal device has positioning-related information, and sends the NRPPa PDU and The logo of the first LMF.
S801:UE与NG-RAN(例如,源基站)以及核心网设备(如第一LMF)交互,执行周期性定位流程。本次周期性定位流程结束后,UE仍可保持在连接态。S801: The UE interacts with the NG-RAN (for example, the source base station) and the core network equipment (such as the first LMF) to perform a periodic positioning process. After the periodic positioning process ends, the UE can still remain in the connected state.
本次周期性定位流程结束后,UE仍可保持在连接态。After the periodic positioning process ends, the UE can still remain in the connected state.
S802:由于UE移动,触发切换流程,UE向源基站发送测量报告(measurement report)。测量报告可包括UE的邻区测量信号强度列表,源基站根据邻区列表选择目标小区所在基站进行切换。S802: Due to the movement of the UE, the handover process is triggered, and the UE sends a measurement report (measurement report) to the source base station. The measurement report may include a neighbor cell measurement signal strength list of the UE, and the source base station selects the base station where the target cell is located based on the neighbor cell list for handover.
S803:源基站向目标基站发送切换请求,其中携带UE的PDU会话相关信息和定位相关信息。S803: The source base station sends a handover request to the target base station, which carries the UE's PDU session-related information and positioning-related information.
如前述,定位相关信息包括SRS参数信息和/或PRS参数信息。其中,SRS参数信息可包括请求的SRS传输特性信息。PRS参数信息可包括请求的PRS传输特性信息。As mentioned above, positioning-related information includes SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information. The SRS parameter information may include requested SRS transmission characteristic information. The PRS parameter information may include requested PRS transmission characteristic information.
可选的,切换请求还可包括第一LMF的标识。Optionally, the handover request may also include the identification of the first LMF.
可选的,切换请求还可包括NRPPa处理标识和/或LPP处理标识。Optionally, the handover request may also include an NRPPa processing identifier and/or an LPP processing identifier.
可以理解,本申请中的第一参数可包括S803中的请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性信息和/或请求的定位参考信号传输特性信息。 It can be understood that the first parameter in this application may include the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or the requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information in S803.
S804:目标基站根据SRS参数信息和/或PRS参数信息确定SRS配置和/或PRS配置。S804: The target base station determines the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration according to the SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information.
可以理解,本申请中的第一配置可包括S804中的SRS配置和/或PRS配置。It can be understood that the first configuration in this application may include the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration in S804.
S805:目标基站向源基站发送切换请求回复(handover request ACK)。S805: The target base station sends a handover request reply (handover request ACK) to the source base station.
其中,切换请求回复可包括SRS配置和/或PRS配置。The handover request reply may include SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
S806:源基站向UE发送RRC消息,如RRC重配置消息,其中携带SRS配置和/或PRS配置。S806: The source base station sends an RRC message, such as an RRC reconfiguration message, to the UE, which carries SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
之后可执行图4所示S406及图4所示流程之后的动作,或执行图5所示流程中S506及之后的动作,或执行图6所示流程中S606及之后的动作,或执行图7所示流程中S706及之后的动作。After that, S406 shown in Figure 4 and the actions after the process shown in Figure 4 can be executed, or the actions after S506 and after in the process shown in Figure 5 can be executed, or the actions after S606 and after in the process shown in Figure 6 can be executed, or the actions after S606 in the process shown in Figure 7 can be executed. Actions after S706 in the process shown.
在如图9所示流程中,在终端设备从源基站移动至目标基站的过程中,由源基站通过切换需要(handover required)消息将第一参数发送至AMF,再由AMF通过切换请求将第一参数发送至目标基站,使得目标基站能够获得第一参数。进一步,目标基站还可根据第一参数确定SRS配置和/或PRS配置,并通过切换请求回复(handover request ACK)向AMF发送SRS配置和/或PRS配置。AMF还可通过切换命令(handover command)将SRS配置和/或PRS配置发送至源基站。In the process shown in Figure 9, when the terminal device moves from the source base station to the target base station, the source base station sends the first parameter to the AMF through the handover required message, and then the AMF sends the third parameter through the handover request. A parameter is sent to the target base station, so that the target base station can obtain the first parameter. Further, the target base station may also determine the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration according to the first parameter, and send the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration to the AMF through a handover request ACK. AMF can also send SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration to the source base station through handover command.
由目标基站确定终端设备存在定位相关信息,并在向AMF发送NRPPa PDU和第一LMF的标识。The target base station determines that the terminal device has positioning-related information, and sends the NRPPa PDU and the identity of the first LMF to the AMF.
S901至S902与图8所示流程中的S801和S802相同,不再赘述。S901 to S902 are the same as S801 and S802 in the process shown in Figure 8 and will not be described again.
S903:源基站向AMF发送切换需要消息,其中携带UE的PDU会话相关信息和定位相关信息。S903: The source base station sends a handover requirement message to the AMF, which carries the UE's PDU session-related information and positioning-related information.
如前述,定位相关信息包括SRS参数信息和/或PRS参数信息。其中,SRS参数信息可包括请求的SRS传输特性信息。PRS参数信息可包括请求的PRS传输特性信息。As mentioned above, positioning-related information includes SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information. The SRS parameter information may include requested SRS transmission characteristic information. The PRS parameter information may include requested PRS transmission characteristic information.
可选的,切换需要还可包括第一LMF的标识。Optionally, the switching requirement may also include the identification of the first LMF.
可选的,切换需要还可包括NRPPa处理标识和/或LPP处理标识。Optionally, the handover requirement may also include an NRPPa processing identifier and/or an LPP processing identifier.
可以理解,本申请中的第一参数可包括S903中的请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性信息和/或请求的定位参考信号传输特性信息。It can be understood that the first parameter in this application may include the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or the requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic information in S903.
S904:AMF向目标基站发送切换请求,切换请求中携带UE的PDU会话相关信息和定位相关信息。S904: The AMF sends a handover request to the target base station. The handover request carries the UE's PDU session related information and positioning related information.
可选的,切换请求还可包括第一LMF的标识、NRPPa处理标识和LPP处理标识中的至少一项。Optionally, the handover request may also include at least one of the identification of the first LMF, the NRPPa processing identification, and the LPP processing identification.
S905:目标基站根据SRS参数信息和/或PRS参数信息确定SRS配置和/或PRS配置。S905: The target base station determines the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration according to the SRS parameter information and/or PRS parameter information.
可以理解,本申请中的第一配置可包括S905中的SRS配置和/或PRS配置。It can be understood that the first configuration in this application may include the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration in S905.
S906:目标基站向AMF发送切换请求回复。S906: The target base station sends a handover request reply to the AMF.
其中,切换请求回复可包括SRS配置和/或PRS配置。The handover request reply may include SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
可以理解,S301第一消息可包括S906中的切换请求回复。It can be understood that the first message in S301 may include the handover request reply in S906.
S907:AMF向源基站发送切换命令,其中可包括SRS配置和/或PRS配置。S907: The AMF sends a handover command to the source base station, which may include SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
S908:源基站向UE发送RRC消息,如RRC重配置消息,其中可携带SRS配置和/或PRS配置。S908: The source base station sends an RRC message, such as an RRC reconfiguration message, to the UE, which may carry SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
S909:UE向目标基站发送切换确认(handover confirm),即UE接入目标基站。S909: The UE sends a handover confirmation (handover confirm) to the target base station, that is, the UE accesses the target base station.
S910:目标基站向AMF发送切换通知(handover notify),携带目标小区的信息。S910: The target base station sends a handover notification (handover notify) to the AMF, carrying the information of the target cell.
可选的,AMF可在接收到切通知后,触发LMF的更改,如执行实施例一中的步骤S409。或者说,之后可执行图4所示S409及图4所示流程之后的动作,或执行图5所示流程中S509及之后的动作,或执行图6所示流程中S608及之后的动作。Optionally, the AMF may trigger changes to the LMF after receiving the notification, such as performing step S409 in Embodiment 1. In other words, S409 shown in FIG. 4 and the actions after S409 in the process shown in FIG. 4 may be executed, or the actions after S509 and thereafter in the process shown in FIG. 5 may be executed, or the actions after S608 and subsequent steps in the process shown in FIG. 6 may be executed.
基于图9所示流程,可以在终端设备的切换过程中,由目标基站获得请求的SRS传输特性信息和/或请求的PRS传输特性信息,用于确定SRS配置和/或PRS配置,不需要目标基站在移动后从LMF获得SRS配置和/或PRS配置,以降低定位业务时延。还可由源基站获得目标基站确定的SRS配置和/或PRS配置,从而由源基站对SRS配置和/或PRS配置进行更新。Based on the process shown in Figure 9, during the handover process of the terminal equipment, the target base station can obtain the requested SRS transmission characteristic information and/or the requested PRS transmission characteristic information for determining the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration, without the need for the target After moving, the base station obtains the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration from the LMF to reduce the positioning service delay. The source base station can also obtain the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration determined by the target base station, so that the source base station updates the SRS configuration and/or PRS configuration.
如图10所示的流程中,用于UE的移动,为UE提供服务的AMF由第二AMF变更为第一AMF,则本申请实施例提供通信方法的一种可能的流程如下:As shown in the process shown in Figure 10, the AMF used for the movement of the UE and providing services for the UE is changed from the second AMF to the first AMF. Then a possible process of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is as follows:
S1001与图8所示S801相同,不再赘述。S1001 is the same as S801 shown in Figure 8 and will not be described again.
S1002:本次周期性定位流程结束后,在下次周期性定位流程开启前,若没有数据传输,UE(终端设备)可进入IDLE态,并且UE可以在IDLE态进行移动。S1002: After this periodic positioning process ends, and before the next periodic positioning process starts, if there is no data transmission, the UE (terminal equipment) can enter the IDLE state, and the UE can move in the IDLE state.
S1003:由于UE移动,UE向基站发送注册请求(Registration Request),其中,注册请求可以是周期性注册流程所触发的,或者可以是终端设备移出注册区域所触发的。注册请求中可包括终端设备的标识。注册请求中还可包括注册类型,例如,注册类型可以是初始注册或周期性注册。注册请求中还可携 带AMF选择辅助信息,该信息用于辅助基站进行AMF选择。S1003: Because the UE moves, the UE sends a registration request (Registration Request) to the base station. The registration request may be triggered by a periodic registration process, or may be triggered by the terminal device moving out of the registration area. The registration request may include the identification of the terminal device. The registration request may also include a registration type, for example, the registration type may be initial registration or periodic registration. The registration request can also be carried With AMF selection auxiliary information, this information is used to assist the base station in AMF selection.
可选的,这里的基站是移动后UE所在的基站,如目标基站。Optionally, the base station here is the base station where the UE is located after moving, such as the target base station.
S1004:基站进行AMF选择,确定第一AMF。S1004: The base station performs AMF selection and determines the first AMF.
其中,基站可根据本地配置选择AMF。Among them, the base station can select AMF according to local configuration.
可选的,如果注册请求中包括AMF选择辅助信息,则基站还可根据AMF选择辅助信息选择AMF。Optionally, if the registration request includes AMF selection assistance information, the base station may also select an AMF based on the AMF selection assistance information.
可以理解,由于UE的移动,基站所选择的第一AMF为新AMF。It can be understood that due to the movement of the UE, the first AMF selected by the base station is the new AMF.
S1005:基站向选择的第一AMF发送注册请求消息,用于请求注册UE,其中包括UE的标识。S1005: The base station sends a registration request message to the selected first AMF to request registration of the UE, which includes the UE's identity.
S1006:第一AMF根据UE的标识,确定第二AMF。S1006: The first AMF determines the second AMF according to the identity of the UE.
示例性的,UE的标识中可包括为UE分配该标识的AMF(即第二AMF)的信息。例如,GUTI中包括AMF指针(AMF pointer),可用于确定该第二AMF。For example, the UE's identity may include information about the AMF (that is, the second AMF) that allocates the identity to the UE. For example, the GUTI includes an AMF pointer, which can be used to determine the second AMF.
可以理解,以上方法实施例中的第一接入管理网元包括这里的第一AMF,第二接入管理网元包括这里的第二AMF。It can be understood that the first access management network element in the above method embodiment includes the first AMF here, and the second access management network element includes the second AMF here.
S1007:第一AMF向第二AMF发送UE上下文传输请求消息(Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer),用于请求UE的UE上下文。S1007: The first AMF sends a UE context transfer request message (Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer) to the second AMF for requesting the UE context of the UE.
S1008:第二AMF向第一AMF发送UE上下文传输请求回复消息(Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer Response),其中可包括UE的UE上下文。S1008: The second AMF sends a UE context transfer request reply message (Namf_CommunicationUEContextTransfer Response) to the first AMF, which may include the UE context of the UE.
相应的,第一AMF可获得UE的UE上下文。Correspondingly, the first AMF may obtain the UE context of the UE.
可以理解,本申请中的第六消息可包括该UE上下文传输请求回复消息。It can be understood that the sixth message in this application may include the UE context transmission request reply message.
S1009:第一AMF根据UE上下文确定UE存在定位相关信息。这里的定位相关信息可是指以上所述的第一信息。S1009: The first AMF determines that the UE has positioning-related information according to the UE context. The positioning-related information here may refer to the first information mentioned above.
例如,第一AMF可根据UE上下文确定UE存在定位业务标识、定位上下文、定位延迟参考标识、定位QoS信息,和定位处理标识中的至少一项,则确定UE存在定位相关信息。For example, the first AMF may determine that the UE has at least one of the positioning service identifier, positioning context, positioning delay reference identifier, positioning QoS information, and positioning processing identifier based on the UE context, and then determines that the UE has positioning-related information.
S1010:第一AMF向LMF发送第七消息。S1010: The first AMF sends the seventh message to the LMF.
其中,第七消息可用于指示接入管理网元已改变,其中,第七消息用于指示接入管理网元改变可以理解为第七消息本身具有该功能;或者,可以理解为第七消息可以为现有消息,但是携带的信元具有显示和/或隐式指示的功能,显示的指示可以是携带了新AMF的标识,隐式的指示可以是AMF改变的指示/通知。The seventh message may be used to indicate that the access management network element has changed. The seventh message may be used to indicate that the access management network element has changed. It may be understood that the seventh message itself has this function; or it may be understood that the seventh message may It is an existing message, but the information element it carries has the function of display and/or implicit indication. The explicit indication may be an identification that carries the new AMF, and the implicit indication may be an indication/notification of AMF change.
该第七消息可包括新AMF的标识,第七消息还可以包含定位业务标识。The seventh message may include the identification of the new AMF, and the seventh message may also include the positioning service identification.
可选的,第七消息可包括N1信息通知消息和/或事件报告消息。Optionally, the seventh message may include an N1 information notification message and/or an event report message.
S1011:LMF接收第七消息,更新UE的定位上下文。S1011: The LMF receives the seventh message and updates the positioning context of the UE.
例如,LMF可以将之前存储在定位上下文中的AMF标识更新为当前的AMF标识。For example, the LMF can update the AMF identity previously stored in the positioning context to the current AMF identity.
可以理解,S1011之后,可基于周期性定位事件触发后续的针对终端设备的定位流程。It can be understood that after S1011, a subsequent positioning process for the terminal device can be triggered based on periodic positioning events.
例如,在S1011之后还可执行图4所示S409及图4所示流程之后的动作,或执行图5所示流程中S509及之后的动作,或执行图6所示流程中S607及之后的动作。For example, after S1011, S409 shown in Figure 4 and the actions after the process shown in Figure 4 can also be executed, or the actions after S509 and after the process shown in Figure 5 can be executed, or the actions after S607 and after the process shown in Figure 6 can be executed. .
还可以理解,S1011中的LMF可以是前述方法实施例中描述的第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元。It can also be understood that the LMF in S1011 may be the first location management network element or the second location management network element described in the foregoing method embodiment.
可以理解,在以上各个实施例中,在终端设备移动至新的基站或目标基站后,若AMF发生更换,则目标AMF(即更换后的AMF)会将其AMF标识通过消息通知给为终端设备定位服务的LMF,例如第一LMF或第二LMF。若LMF发生更换,即由第一LMF更换为第二LMF,则AMF可以将UE的位置信息通过消息通知给第二LMF。如本申请中的描述,UE的位置信息可包括UE所在的基站(例如,目标基站)的标识和/或UE所在的小区标识等。该消息可以是N2消息通知或其他消息。第二LMF可接收UE的位置信息,并根据UE的位置信息选择UE的合适的邻基站发送第一定位信息,例如,第一定位信息包括更新后的SRS和/或PRS配置信息,以使能接入网设备针对UE进行定位测量。It can be understood that in the above embodiments, after the terminal device moves to a new base station or a target base station, if the AMF is replaced, the target AMF (ie, the replaced AMF) will notify the terminal device of its AMF identifier through a message. The LMF of the location service, such as the first LMF or the second LMF. If the LMF is changed, that is, from the first LMF to the second LMF, the AMF can notify the second LMF of the location information of the UE through a message. As described in this application, the location information of the UE may include the identity of the base station where the UE is located (for example, the target base station) and/or the identity of the cell where the UE is located, etc. The message can be an N2 message notification or other message. The second LMF may receive the location information of the UE and select an appropriate neighboring base station of the UE to send the first positioning information according to the location information of the UE. For example, the first positioning information includes updated SRS and/or PRS configuration information to enable The access network equipment performs positioning measurements on the UE.
可以理解的是,为了实现上述实施例中功能,本申请实施例提供的通信装置包括了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本申请中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及方法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件相结合的形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用场景和设计约束条件。 It can be understood that, in order to implement the functions in the above embodiments, the communication device provided by the embodiments of the present application includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules that perform each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the units and method steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in this application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software driving the hardware depends on the specific application scenarios and design constraints of the technical solution.
图11和图12为本申请的实施例提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。这些通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请的实施例中,该通信装置可以是第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备,也可以是第一接入管理网元中的模块、第二位置管理网元中的模块或第二接入网设备中的模块。Figures 11 and 12 are schematic structural diagrams of possible communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the first access management network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device may be a first access management network element, a second location management network element, or a second access network device, or may be a module in the first access management network element, a second location management network element, or a module in the first access management network element. The module in the second position management network element or the module in the second access network device.
图11所示的通信装置1100包括处理单元1110和收发单元1120。通信装置1100用于实现上述方法实施例中第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备的功能。收发单元1120可以用于实现相应的通信功能。收发单元1120还可以称为通信接口或通信单元,可包括发送单元和/或接收单元。处理单元1110可以用于实现相应的处理功能。可选地,该通信装置1100还包括存储单元,该存储单元可以用于存储指令和/或数据,处理单元1110可以读取存储单元中的指令和/或数据,以使得通信装置1100实现前述各个方法实施例中的第一接入管理网元(如第一AMF)、第二位置管理网元(如第二LMF)或第二接入网设备(如目标基站)的动作。The communication device 1100 shown in FIG. 11 includes a processing unit 1110 and a transceiver unit 1120. The communication device 1100 is used to implement the functions of the first access management network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device in the above method embodiment. The transceiver unit 1120 may be used to implement corresponding communication functions. The transceiver unit 1120 may also be called a communication interface or a communication unit, and may include a sending unit and/or a receiving unit. The processing unit 1110 may be used to implement corresponding processing functions. Optionally, the communication device 1100 further includes a storage unit, which can be used to store instructions and/or data, and the processing unit 1110 can read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the communication device 1100 implements each of the above. Actions of the first access management network element (such as the first AMF), the second location management network element (such as the second LMF) or the second access network device (such as the target base station) in the method embodiment.
当该通信装置1100用于实现上述方法实施例中的第一接入管理网元的功能,收发单元1120可接收第二接入网设备发送的第一消息,该第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,该第一位置管理网元用于向该第一接入网设备发送该终端设备的定位信息,其中,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至第二接入网设备。处理单元1110还可确定第二位置管理网元,该第二位置管理网元用于向该第二接入网设备发送该终端设备的定位信息。收发单元1120还可向该第二位置管理网元发送第二消息,和/或,该第一接入管理网元向该第一接入网设备发送第三消息。其中,该第二消息包括该第一定位信息、小区标识、该第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,该小区属于该第二接入网设备,该第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变。该第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,该第三消息包括该第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括该第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:该第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,该第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。When the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the first access management network element in the above method embodiment, the transceiver unit 1120 can receive the first message sent by the second access network device, where the first message includes the first location management The identification of the network element and the first positioning information, the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device, wherein the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second Access network equipment. The processing unit 1110 may also determine a second location management network element, which is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device. The transceiver unit 1120 may also send a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the first access network device. Wherein, the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device, and a first indication. The cell belongs to the second access network device, and the first indication Used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed. The third message is used to notify the location management network element that the location management network element has changed. The third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: the third location management network element. An identifier of a location management network element and a second indication, the second indication being used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
一种可能的实现方法中,收发单元1120还可接收第四消息,该第四消息包括该终端设备的位置信息。处理单元1110还可根据该终端设备的位置信息确定该第二位置管理网元。In a possible implementation method, the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a fourth message, where the fourth message includes the location information of the terminal device. The processing unit 1110 may also determine the second location management network element according to the location information of the terminal device.
一种可能的实现方法中,处理单元1110还可根据该终端设备的位置信息,确定该第一位置管理网元无法支持对该终端设备定位。In a possible implementation method, the processing unit 1110 may also determine based on the location information of the terminal device that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device.
一种可能的实现方法中,收发单元1120向该第一接入网设备发送该第三消息,则收发单元1120还可接收第五消息。该第五消息包括以下信息中的至少一个:该第二位置管理网元的标识、定位业务标识、第三指示、终端设备的标识、终端上下文标识,该第三指示用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。In a possible implementation method, the transceiver unit 1120 sends the third message to the first access network device, and the transceiver unit 1120 can also receive the fifth message. The fifth message includes at least one of the following information: the identifier of the second location management network element, the positioning service identifier, a third indication, the identifier of the terminal device, and the terminal context identifier. The third indication is used to indicate the location management network element. already changed.
一种可能的实现方法中,收发单元1120还可接收来自于第二接入管理网元第六消息,该第六消息用于提取UE上下文。处理单元1110还可根据该UE上下文确定该终端设备存在定位信息。In a possible implementation method, the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a sixth message from the second access management network element, where the sixth message is used to extract the UE context. The processing unit 1110 may also determine that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发单元1120还可向该第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送该第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,收发单元1120还可向该第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送该第一接入管理网元的标识,以及该终端设备的标识和/或该定位业务标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1120 may also send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element; or, the transceiver unit 1120 may also send the identifier of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element. The first location management network element or the second location management network element sends the identifier of the first access management network element, the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发单元1120还可向该第一位置管理网元或该第二位置管理网元发送第七消息,该第七消息用于指示接入管理网元已改变。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1120 may also send a seventh message to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, where the seventh message is used to indicate that the access management network element has changed.
当该通信装置1100用于实现上述方法实施例中的第二位置管理网元的功能,收发单元1120可用于接收来自于第一接入管理网元的第二消息,该第二消息包括该第一定位信息、小区标识、该第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,该小区属于该第二接入网设备。收发单元1120还可用于向该第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息,该终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至该第二接入网设备。该第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变。When the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the second location management network element in the above method embodiment, the transceiver unit 1120 can be used to receive a second message from the first access management network element, where the second message includes the third location management network element. At least one of positioning information, a cell identifier, an identifier of the second access network device, and a first indication, the cell belongs to the second access network device. The transceiver unit 1120 may also be configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device. The first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发单元1120还可用向第三接入网设备发送该第一定位信息,该第三接入网设备是该第二位置管理网元选择的接入网设备。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1120 may also send the first positioning information to a third access network device, which is the access network device selected by the second location management network element.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发单元1120还可接收该第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,该第二位置管理网元接收该第一接入管理网元的标识,以及该终端设备的标识和/或该定位业务标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive the identity of the first access management network element; or the second location management network element receives the identity of the first access management network element, and the terminal The identification of the device and/or the identification of the positioning service.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元1110还可根据第一接入管理网元的标识更新该终端设备的定位上下文;或者,处理单元1110还可根据该第一接入管理网元的标识,以及该终端设备的标识和/或该定位业务标识,更新该终端设备的定位上下文。 In a possible implementation, the processing unit 1110 may also update the positioning context of the terminal device according to the identity of the first access management network element; or, the processing unit 1110 may also update the positioning context of the terminal device according to the identity of the first access management network element. , and the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier, and update the positioning context of the terminal device.
当该通信装置1100用于实现上述方法实施例中的第二接入网设备的功能,处理单元1110可用于确定第一配置,该第一配置包括信道探测参考信号配置和/或定位参考信号配置,终端设备从该第一接入网设备移动至该第二接入网设备。收发单元1120可向第一接入管理网元发送第一消息,该第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,该第一定位信息包括该第一配置,该第一位置管理网元用于向该第一接入网设备发送该终端设备的定位信息。When the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the second access network device in the above method embodiment, the processing unit 1110 can be used to determine the first configuration, where the first configuration includes a channel sounding reference signal configuration and/or a positioning reference signal configuration. , the terminal equipment moves from the first access network equipment to the second access network equipment. The transceiver unit 1120 may send a first message to the first access management network element. The first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and the first positioning information. The first positioning information includes the first configuration, the first The location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发单元1120还可接收来自于该第一接入管理网元的第三消息,该第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,该第三消息包括该第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括该第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:该第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,该第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a third message from the first access management network element. The third message is used to notify the location management network element that the location management network element has changed. The third message includes the The identifier of the second location management network element, or the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: the identifier of the first location management network element and a second indication, the second indication is used to indicate the location The management network element has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发单元1120还可接收来自该第一接入网设备的第一参数,该第一参数包括请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性信息和/或请求的定位参考信号传输特性信息。处理单元1110还可根据该第一参数确定该第一配置。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1120 may also receive a first parameter from the first access network device, where the first parameter includes the requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic information and/or the requested positioning reference signal. Transfer characteristic information. The processing unit 1110 may also determine the first configuration according to the first parameter.
有关上述处理单元1110和收发单元1120更详细的描述可以直接参考上述方法实施例中相关描述直接得到,这里不加赘述。More detailed descriptions about the above processing unit 1110 and the transceiver unit 1120 can be obtained directly by referring to the relevant descriptions in the above method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
图12所示的通信装置1200包括处理器1210和接口电路1220。处理器1210和接口电路1220之间相互耦合。可以理解的是,接口电路1220可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选的,通信装置1200还可以包括存储器1230,用于存储处理器1210执行的指令或存储处理器1210运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器1210运行指令后产生的数据。The communication device 1200 shown in FIG. 12 includes a processor 1210 and an interface circuit 1220. The processor 1210 and the interface circuit 1220 are coupled to each other. It can be understood that the interface circuit 1220 may be a transceiver or an input-output interface. Optionally, the communication device 1200 may also include a memory 1230 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1210 or input data required for the processor 1210 to run the instructions or data generated after the processor 1210 executes the instructions.
当通信装置1200用于实现上述方法实施例时,处理器1210用于实现上述处理单元1110的功能,接口电路1220用于实现上述收发单元1120的功能。When the communication device 1200 is used to implement the above method embodiment, the processor 1210 is used to realize the function of the above processing unit 1110, and the interface circuit 1220 is used to realize the function of the above transceiver unit 1120.
可以理解的是,本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件,硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器,也可以是任何常规的处理器。It can be understood that the processor in the embodiment of the present application can be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), or application-specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof. A general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现,也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于基站或终端中。The method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware or by a processor executing software instructions. Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory In memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium well known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor. The processor and storage media may be located in an ASIC. Of course, the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the base station or terminal.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统可以包括上述实施例涉及的第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备。Based on the above embodiments, embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, which may include the first access management network element, the second location management network element, or the second access network device involved in the above embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的通信方法中由第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备实现的动作。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment. Actions implemented by the first access management network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的通信方法由第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备实现的动作。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product. The computer program product is used to store a computer program. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment by the first access management Actions implemented by the network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于调用所述存储器中的程序使得所述芯片实现上述方法实施例提供的通信方法由第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备实现的动作。Embodiments of the present application also provide a chip, including a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and is used to call a program in the memory so that the chip implements the communication method provided by the above method embodiment. The communication method is managed by the first access. Actions implemented by the network element, the second location management network element or the second access network device.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,所述芯片与存储器耦合,所述芯片用于实现上述方法实施例提供的通信方法由第一接入管理网元、第二位置管理网元或第二接入网设备实现的动作。Embodiments of the present application also provide a chip, which is coupled to a memory. The chip is used to implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment. It is composed of a first access management network element, a second location management network element or a second access management network element. Actions implemented by network access equipment.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、 CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art will understand that embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment that combines software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may employ computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk memory, disk memory, computer-usable program code) embodied therein. The form of a computer program product implemented on a CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.).
本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to the present application. It will be understood that each process and/or block in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of processes and/or blocks in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine, such that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce a use A device for realizing the functions specified in one process or multiple processes of the flowchart and/or one block or multiple blocks of the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that causes a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including the instruction means, the instructions The device implements the functions specified in a process or processes of the flowchart and/or a block or blocks of the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device, causing a series of operating steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing, thereby executing on the computer or other programmable device. Instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in a process or processes of a flowchart diagram and/or a block or blocks of a block diagram.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the scope of the present application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and equivalent technologies, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、基站、UE或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘;还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘。该计算机可读存储介质可以是易失性或非易失性存储介质,或可包括易失性和非易失性两种类型的存储介质。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are executed in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a base station, a UE, or other programmable devices. The computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another. For example, the computer program or instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits via wired or wireless means to another website site, computer, server, or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media, such as floppy disks, hard disks, and tapes; optical media, such as digital video optical disks; or semiconductor media, such as solid-state hard drives. The computer-readable storage medium may be volatile or nonvolatile storage media, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile types of storage media.
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of this application, if there is no special explanation or logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referenced to each other. The technical features in different embodiments are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments.
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。在本申请的文字描述中,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系;在本申请的公式中,字符“/”,表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。In this application, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "plurality" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. In the text description of this application, the character "/" generally indicates that the related objects before and after are an "or" relationship; in the formula of this application, the character "/" indicates that the related objects before and after are a kind of "division" Relationship.
可以理解的是,在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。 It can be understood that the various numerical numbers involved in the embodiments of the present application are only for convenience of description and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The size of the serial numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic.

Claims (47)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized by including:
    第一接入管理网元接收第二接入网设备发送的第一消息,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息;The first access management network element receives the first message sent by the second access network device, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device. The first message includes the first location management The identification of the network element and the first positioning information, the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device;
    所述第一接入管理网元确定第二位置管理网元,所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息;The first access management network element determines a second location management network element, and the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device;
    所述第一接入管理网元向所述第二位置管理网元发送第二消息,和/或,所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一接入网设备发送第三消息;The first access management network element sends a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the first access network device;
    其中,所述第二消息包括所述第一定位信息、小区标识、所述第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备;所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变;Wherein, the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device, and a first indication, and the cell belongs to the second access network device. ;The first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed;
    所述第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,所述第三消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。The third message is used to notify that the location management network element has changed. The third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information. One: the identification of the first location management network element and a second indication, where the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。The method of claim 1, wherein the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,在接收所述第一消息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, before receiving the first message, the method further includes:
    所述第一接入管理网元接收第四消息,所述第四消息包括所述终端设备的位置信息;The first access management network element receives a fourth message, where the fourth message includes location information of the terminal device;
    所述第一接入管理网元确定第二位置管理网元,包括:The first access management network element determines the second location management network element, including:
    所述第一接入管理网元根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元。The first access management network element determines the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 3, further comprising:
    所述第四消息用于路径切换、用于通知切换、用于请求切换,或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文。The fourth message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting to create a context of the terminal device.
  5. 如权利要求1-4中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-4, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述第一消息用于路径切换、用于通知切换、用于请求切换,或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文,所述第一消息还包括所述终端设备的位置信息;The first message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting to create a context of a terminal device, and the first message also includes location information of the terminal device;
    所述第一接入管理网元确定第二位置管理网元,包括:The first access management network element determines the second location management network element, including:
    所述第一接入管理网元根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元。The first access management network element determines the second location management network element based on the location information of the terminal device.
  6. 如权利要求3-5中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 3-5, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述第一接入管理网元根据所述终端设备的位置信息,确定所述第一位置管理网元无法支持对所述终端设备定位。The first access management network element determines that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device based on the location information of the terminal device.
  7. 如权利要求1-6中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一接入网设备发送所述第三消息,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, characterized in that the first access management network element sends the third message to the first access network device, and the method further includes:
    所述第一接入管理网元接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括以下信息中的至少一个:所述第二位置管理网元的标识、定位业务标识、第三指示、终端设备的标识、终端上下文标识,所述第三指示用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。The first access management network element receives a fifth message, and the fifth message includes at least one of the following information: an identifier of the second location management network element, a positioning service identifier, a third indication, and an identifier of a terminal device. . Terminal context identifier, the third indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  8. 如权利要求1-7中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, characterized in that the method further includes:
    第一接入管理网元接收来自于第二接入管理网元第六消息,所述第六消息用于提取UE上下文;The first access management network element receives a sixth message from the second access management network element, where the sixth message is used to extract the UE context;
    所述第一接入管理网元根据所述UE上下文确定所述终端设备存在定位信息。The first access management network element determines that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括: The method of claim 8, further comprising:
    所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送所述第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,The first access management network element sends the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element; or,
    所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识。The first access management network element sends the identification of the first access management network element, the identification of the terminal device and/or the identification of the terminal device to the first location management network element or the second location management network element. Locate the business identity.
  10. 如权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述第一接入管理网元向第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送第七消息,所述第七消息用于指示接入管理网元已改变。The first access management network element sends a seventh message to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, where the seventh message is used to indicate that the access management network element has changed.
  11. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized by including:
    第二位置管理网元接收来自于第一接入管理网元的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述第一定位信息、小区标识、和所述第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备;所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息,所述终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备;所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变;The second location management network element receives a second message from the first access management network element. The second message includes the first positioning information, the cell identifier, the identifier of the second access network device, and the second message. At least one piece of information in an indication, the cell belongs to the second access network device; the second location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device, and the terminal The device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device; the first indication is used to indicate that the access network device has changed;
    所述第二位置管理网元向第一接入管理网元发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识和/或第三指示,所述第三指示用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。The second location management network element sends a fifth message to the first access management network element. The fifth message includes the identification of the second location management network element and/or a third indication. The third indication is The management network element at the indicated location has changed.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第五消息还包括以下中的至少一个信息:终端设备的标识、终端上下文标识、定位业务标识。The method of claim 11, wherein the fifth message further includes at least one of the following information: an identification of a terminal device, a terminal context identification, and a positioning service identification.
  13. 如权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述第二位置管理网元向第三接入网设备发送所述第一定位信息,所述第三接入网设备是所述第二位置管理网元选择的接入网设备。The second location management network element sends the first positioning information to a third access network device, and the third access network device is the access network device selected by the second location management network element.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三接入网设备是所述第二位置管理网元根据所述第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识选择的接入网设备,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备。The method according to claim 13, characterized in that the third access network device is an access selected by the second location management network element according to the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device. network equipment, and the cell belongs to the second access network equipment.
  15. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三接入网设备包括所述第二接入网设备相邻接入网设备。The method of claim 12, wherein the third access network device includes an access network device adjacent to the second access network device.
  16. 如权利要求11-15中任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, characterized in that the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  17. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 11, further comprising:
    所述第二位置管理网元接收所述第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,The second location management network element receives the identification of the first access management network element; or,
    所述第二位置管理网元接收所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识。The second location management network element receives the identity of the first access management network element, the identity of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identity.
  18. 如权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 17, further comprising:
    所述第二位置管理网元根据所述第一接入管理网元的标识更新所述终端设备的定位上下文;或者,The second location management network element updates the positioning context of the terminal device according to the identification of the first access management network element; or,
    所述第二位置管理网元根据所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识,更新所述终端设备的定位上下文。The second location management network element updates the positioning context of the terminal device according to the identifier of the first access management network element, the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier.
  19. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized by including:
    第二接入网设备确定第一配置,所述第一配置包括信道探测参考信号配置和/或定位参考信号配置,终端设备从所述第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备;The second access network device determines a first configuration, the first configuration includes a channel sounding reference signal configuration and/or a positioning reference signal configuration, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network equipment;
    所述第二接入网设备向第一接入管理网元发送第一消息,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,所述第一定位信息包括所述第一配置,所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息。 The second access network device sends a first message to the first access management network element, the first message includes the identification of the first location management network element and first positioning information, the first positioning information includes the In a first configuration, the first location management network element is configured to send positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 19, further comprising:
    所述第二接入网设备接收来自于所述第一接入管理网元的第三消息,所述第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,所述第三消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。The second access network device receives a third message from the first access management network element, the third message is used to notify the location management network element that the location management network element has changed, and the third message includes the second The identification of the location management network element, or the identification of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: the identification of the first location management network element and a second indication, the second indication is used to indicate The location management network element has changed.
  21. 如权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述第二接入网设备接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一参数,所述第一参数包括请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性和/或请求的定位参考信号传输特性;The second access network device receives a first parameter from the first access network device, where the first parameter includes a requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic and/or a requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic;
    所述第二接入网设备确定第一配置,包括:The second access network device determines the first configuration, including:
    所述第二接入网设备根据所述第一参数确定所述第一配置。The second access network device determines the first configuration according to the first parameter.
  22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by including:
    收发单元,用于接收第二接入网设备发送的第一消息,终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息;A transceiver unit configured to receive a first message sent by a second access network device. The terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device. The first message includes a first location management network element. The identification and the first positioning information, the first location management network element is used to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device;
    处理单元,用于确定第二位置管理网元,所述第二位置管理网元用于向所述第二接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息;A processing unit configured to determine a second location management network element, and the second location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device;
    所述收发单元,还用于向所述第二位置管理网元发送第二消息,和/或,所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一接入网设备发送第三消息;The transceiver unit is further configured to send a second message to the second location management network element, and/or the first access management network element sends a third message to the first access network device;
    其中,所述第二消息包括所述第一定位信息、小区标识、所述第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备;所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变;Wherein, the second message includes at least one of the first positioning information, a cell identity, an identity of the second access network device, and a first indication, and the cell belongs to the second access network device. ;The first indication is used to indicate that the access network equipment has changed;
    所述第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,所述第三消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。The third message is used to notify that the location management network element has changed. The third message includes the identifier of the second location management network element, or includes the identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: One: the identification of the first location management network element and a second indication, where the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  23. 如权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。The apparatus of claim 22, wherein the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  24. 如权利要求22或23所述的装置,其特征在于,在接收所述第一消息之前,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to claim 22 or 23, characterized in that, before receiving the first message, the transceiver unit is also used to:
    接收第四消息,所述第四消息包括所述终端设备的位置信息;Receive a fourth message, the fourth message including location information of the terminal device;
    所述处理单元具体用于:The processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元。The second location management network element is determined according to the location information of the terminal device.
  25. 如权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第四消息用于路径切换、用于通知切换、用于请求切换,或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文。The apparatus of claim 24, wherein the fourth message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting creation of a context of the terminal device.
  26. 如权利要求22-25中任一所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 22-25, characterized in that the transceiver unit is also used for:
    所述第一消息用于路径切换、用于通知切换、用于请求切换,或用于请求创建终端设备的上下文,所述第一消息还包括所述终端设备的位置信息;The first message is used for path switching, for notifying switching, for requesting switching, or for requesting to create a context of a terminal device, and the first message also includes location information of the terminal device;
    所述处理单元具体用于:The processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述终端设备的位置信息确定所述第二位置管理网元。The second location management network element is determined according to the location information of the terminal device.
  27. 如权利要求24-26中任一所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 24-26, characterized in that the processing unit is also used for:
    根据所述终端设备的位置信息,确定所述第一位置管理网元无法支持对所述终端设备定位。According to the location information of the terminal device, it is determined that the first location management network element cannot support positioning of the terminal device.
  28. 如权利要求22-27中任一所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一接入管理网元向所述第一接入网 设备发送所述第三消息,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 22 to 27, characterized in that the first access management network element provides information to the first access network The device sends the third message, and the transceiver unit is also used to:
    接收第五消息,所述第五消息包括以下信息中的至少一个:所述第二位置管理网元的标识、定位业务标识、第三指示、终端设备的标识、终端上下文标识,所述第三指示用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。Receive a fifth message, where the fifth message includes at least one of the following information: an identifier of the second location management network element, a positioning service identifier, a third indication, an identifier of a terminal device, and a terminal context identifier, and the third The indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  29. 如权利要求22-28中任一所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 22-28, characterized in that the transceiver unit is also used for:
    接收来自于第二接入管理网元第六消息,所述第六消息用于提取UE上下文;Receive a sixth message from the second access management network element, the sixth message being used to extract the UE context;
    所述处理单元还用于:The processing unit is also used to:
    根据所述UE上下文确定所述终端设备存在定位信息。It is determined that the terminal device has positioning information according to the UE context.
  30. 如权利要求29所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to claim 29, characterized in that the transceiver unit is also used for:
    向所述第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送所述第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,Send the identification of the first access management network element to the first location management network element or the second location management network element; or,
    向所述第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识。Send the identifier of the first access management network element, the identifier of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identifier to the first location management network element or the second location management network element.
  31. 如权利要求29或30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to claim 29 or 30, characterized in that the transceiver unit is also used for:
    向第一位置管理网元或第二位置管理网元发送第七消息,所述第七消息用于指示接入管理网元已改变。A seventh message is sent to the first location management network element or the second location management network element, where the seventh message is used to indicate that the access management network element has changed.
  32. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by including:
    接收单元,用于接收来自于第一接入管理网元的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述第一定位信息、小区标识、和所述第二接入网设备的标识和第一指示中的至少一个信息,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备;向所述第二接入网设备发送终端设备的定位信息,所述终端设备从第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备;所述第一指示用于指示接入网设备已改变;A receiving unit configured to receive a second message from the first access management network element, where the second message includes the first positioning information, the cell identifier, the identifier of the second access network device and the first At least one information in the indication, the cell belongs to the second access network device; sending positioning information of the terminal device to the second access network device, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the the second access network device; the first indication is used to indicate that the access network device has changed;
    发送单元,用于向第一接入管理网元发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识和/或第三指示,所述第三指示用于指示位置管理网元已经改变。A sending unit, configured to send a fifth message to the first access management network element, where the fifth message includes the identification of the second location management network element and/or a third indication, where the third indication is used to indicate the location. The management network element has changed.
  33. 如权利要求32所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第五消息还包括以下中的至少一个信息:终端设备的标识、终端上下文标识、定位业务标识。The apparatus of claim 32, wherein the fifth message further includes at least one of the following information: an identification of a terminal device, a terminal context identification, and a positioning service identification.
  34. 如权利要求32或33所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元还用于:The device according to claim 32 or 33, characterized in that the sending unit is also used for:
    向第三接入网设备发送所述第一定位信息,所述第三接入网设备是所述第二位置管理网元选择的接入网设备。Send the first positioning information to a third access network device, where the third access network device is the access network device selected by the second location management network element.
  35. 如权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第三接入网设备是所述第二位置管理网元根据所述第二接入网设备的标识和/或小区标识选择的接入网设备,所述小区属于所述第二接入网设备。The apparatus according to claim 34, wherein the third access network device is an access selected by the second location management network element according to the identifier and/or cell identifier of the second access network device. network equipment, and the cell belongs to the second access network equipment.
  36. 如权利要求33所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第三接入网设备包括所述第二接入网设备相邻接入网设备。The apparatus according to claim 33, wherein the third access network device includes an access network device adjacent to the second access network device.
  37. 如权利要求32-36中任一所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。The device according to any one of claims 32 to 36, wherein the second message further includes a second indication, and the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  38. 如权利要求32所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元还用于:The device according to claim 32, characterized in that the receiving unit is also used for:
    接收所述第一接入管理网元的标识;或者,Receive the identification of the first access management network element; or,
    接收所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识。Receive the identification of the first access management network element, the identification of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identification.
  39. 如权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to claim 38, characterized in that the transceiver unit is also used for:
    根据所述第一接入管理网元的标识更新所述终端设备的定位上下文;或者,Update the positioning context of the terminal device according to the identity of the first access management network element; or,
    根据所述第一接入管理网元的标识,以及所述终端设备的标识和/或所述定位业务标识,更新所述 终端设备的定位上下文。According to the identity of the first access management network element, the identity of the terminal device and/or the positioning service identity, update the The positioning context of the end device.
  40. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理单元,用于确定第一配置,所述第一配置包括信道探测参考信号配置和/或定位参考信号配置,终端设备从所述第一接入网设备移动至所述第二接入网设备;A processing unit configured to determine a first configuration, the first configuration including a channel sounding reference signal configuration and/or a positioning reference signal configuration, and the terminal device moves from the first access network device to the second access network device ;
    收发单元,用于向第一接入管理网元发送第一消息,所述第一消息包括第一位置管理网元的标识和第一定位信息,所述第一定位信息包括所述第一配置,所述第一位置管理网元用于向所述第一接入网设备发送所述终端设备的定位信息。A transceiver unit configured to send a first message to a first access management network element, where the first message includes an identifier of a first location management network element and first positioning information, where the first positioning information includes the first configuration. , the first location management network element is configured to send the positioning information of the terminal device to the first access network device.
  41. 如权利要求40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to claim 40, characterized in that the transceiver unit is also used for:
    接收来自于所述第一接入管理网元的第三消息,所述第三消息用于通知位置管理网元已改变,所述第三消息包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识,或包括所述第二位置管理网元的标识与以下信息中的至少一个:所述第一位置管理网元的标识和第二指示,所述第二指示用于指示位置管理网元已改变。Receive a third message from the first access management network element, the third message is used to notify that the location management network element has changed, and the third message includes the identification of the second location management network element, or The method includes an identifier of the second location management network element and at least one of the following information: an identifier of the first location management network element and a second indication, where the second indication is used to indicate that the location management network element has changed.
  42. 如权利要求40或41所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to claim 40 or 41, characterized in that the transceiver unit is also used for:
    接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一参数,所述第一参数包括请求的信道探测参考信号传输特性和/或请求的定位参考信号传输特性;Receive a first parameter from the first access network device, where the first parameter includes a requested channel sounding reference signal transmission characteristic and/or a requested positioning reference signal transmission characteristic;
    所述处理单元具体用于:The processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述第一参数确定所述第一配置。The first configuration is determined based on the first parameters.
  43. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括第一接入管理网元和第二位置管理网元,所述第一接入管理网元用于执行如权利要求1~10任一项所述的方法,所述第二位置管理网元用于执行如权利要求11~18任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a first access management network element and a second location management network element, the first access management network element being used to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10 , the second location management network element is used to perform the method according to any one of claims 11 to 18.
  44. 如权利要求43所述的装置,其特征在于,还包括第二接入网设备,所述第二接入网设备用于执行如权利要求19~21任一项所述的方法。The apparatus according to claim 43, further comprising a second access network device, the second access network device being configured to perform the method according to any one of claims 19 to 21.
  45. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-21中任一所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and is used to execute a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes any of claims 1-21. The method described in 1.
  46. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-21中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium. When the computer program is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute any one of claims 1-21. method described in the item.
  47. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括用于执行如权利要求1-21中任一项所述的方法的指令。 A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes instructions for executing the method according to any one of claims 1-21.
PCT/CN2023/101263 2022-08-09 2023-06-20 Communication method and apparatus WO2024032156A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210952627.1 2022-08-09
CN202210952627.1A CN117641227A (en) 2022-08-09 2022-08-09 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024032156A1 true WO2024032156A1 (en) 2024-02-15

Family

ID=89850607

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/101263 WO2024032156A1 (en) 2022-08-09 2023-06-20 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117641227A (en)
WO (1) WO2024032156A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112601280A (en) * 2020-12-09 2021-04-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Addressing processing method and device, storage medium and electronic device
WO2021183988A1 (en) * 2020-03-13 2021-09-16 Ofinno, Llc Handover
CN114270882A (en) * 2019-08-14 2022-04-01 高通股份有限公司 System and method for 5G location session handoff of NG-RAN location management component

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114270882A (en) * 2019-08-14 2022-04-01 高通股份有限公司 System and method for 5G location session handoff of NG-RAN location management component
WO2021183988A1 (en) * 2020-03-13 2021-09-16 Ofinno, Llc Handover
CN112601280A (en) * 2020-12-09 2021-04-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Addressing processing method and device, storage medium and electronic device

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; 5G System (5GS) Location Services (LCS); Stage 2 (Release 17)", 3GPP STANDARD; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION; 3GPP TS 23.273, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, no. V17.2.0, 24 September 2021 (2021-09-24), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, pages 1 - 99, XP052056718 *
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED, CATT, CHINA MOBILE, VERIZON, ZTE: "5G System Procedures for Location Support of Emergency Services", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-177256_P-CR FOR TS 23.502 FOR 5G SYSTEM PROCEDURES FOR LOCATION-V7, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. SA WG2, no. Ljubljana, Slovenia; 20171023 - 20171027, 22 October 2017 (2017-10-22), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051347212 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117641227A (en) 2024-03-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11864131B2 (en) Measurement configuration method and apparatus
EP3739920B1 (en) Method, device, and system for configuring policy of ue
WO2022257549A1 (en) Network slicing method and device, and storage medium
EP2497287B1 (en) Node selection in a communication network
EP1890516B1 (en) Apparatus and method for providing service status information based on access class restriction list in mobile communication system
EP3811654B1 (en) Automatic neighbor relation enhancements for dual connectivity
CN112637785B (en) Method and apparatus for multicast transmission
CN104488327A (en) Positioning-assisted cell selection and handover for LTE
US20230362766A1 (en) Access network node, user equipment, network function node and control method
US11234185B2 (en) Cell identifier format per area in wireless network
WO2021168647A1 (en) Method for providing network slice, and communication apparatus
CN109874301B (en) Communication method, device and system
CN113259924A (en) Private network subscription information updating method and device
WO2024032156A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20220322222A1 (en) Method and apparatus for supporting service continuity in npn using nwdaf
US20220053326A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
EP4113743A1 (en) Method and device for controlling terminal connection state for providing ultra-low-latency location information service in wireless communication system
CN108464056A (en) Configuration method, device, base station and the equipment of the core network of user equipment information
WO2023024948A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining position
US20230116776A1 (en) Method and device for controlling terminal connection state for providing ultra-low-latency location information service in wireless communication system
WO2024032095A1 (en) Network element handover method, apparatus, and system
WO2024016929A1 (en) Method and apparatus for positioning
WO2023045741A1 (en) Positioning method and apparatus, and readable storage medium
WO2023238806A1 (en) Method of first communication apparatus, method of communication apparatus, first communication apparatus and communication apparatus
WO2023142695A1 (en) Slice-based communication method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23851383

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1